initial import

git-svn-id: svn+slack://slack.fluxo.info/var/svn/simplepkg@1 04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58
author: rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58> 2006-07-31 20:54:39 +0000
committer: rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58> 2006-07-31 20:54:39 +0000
commit: 546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c (patch)
tree: c4108b4022d6e77cd4a1d02c78860b884178efa0 /templates
download: simplepkg-546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c.tar.gz
simplepkg-546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c.tar.bz2
73 files changed, 10138 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/templates/mplayer.metapkg b/templates/mplayer.metapkg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90d2ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/mplayer.metapkg
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+libmad
+esound
+glib
+libogg
+libvorbis
+libungif
+gtk
+arts
+audiofile
+sdl
+gdk-pixbuf
+cdparanoia
+lame
+essential
diff --git a/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh b/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..94e8a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.csh
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#!/bin/csh
+# Set the system locale.  (no, we don't have a menu for this ;-)
+# For a list of locales which are supported by this machine, type:
+#   locale -a
+
+# en_US is the Slackware default locale:
+setenv LANG pt_BR
+
+# 'C' is the old Slackware (and UNIX) default, which is 127-bit
+# ASCII with a charmap setting of ANSI_X3.4-1968.  These days,
+# it's better to use en_US or another modern $LANG setting to
+# support extended character sets.
+#setenv LANG C
+
+# There is also support for UTF-8 locales, but be aware that
+# some programs are not yet able to handle UTF-8 and will fail to
+# run properly.  In those cases, you can set LANG=C before
+# starting them.  Still, I'd avoid UTF unless you actually need it.
+#setenv LANG en_US.UTF-8
+
+# Another option for en_US:
+#setenv LANG en_US.ISO8859-1
+
+# One side effect of the newer locales is that the sort order
+# is no longer according to ASCII values, so the sort order will
+# change in many places.  Since this isn't usually expected and
+# can break scripts, we'll stick with traditional ASCII sorting.
+# If you'd prefer the sort algorithm that goes with your $LANG
+# setting, comment this out.
+setenv LC_COLLATE C
+
+# End of /etc/profile.d/lang.csh
+
diff --git a/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh b/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..c9cde20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/openoffice.d/etc/profile.d/lang.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Set the system locale.  (no, we don't have a menu for this ;-)
+# For a list of locales which are supported by this machine, type:
+#   locale -a
+
+# en_US is the Slackware default locale:
+export LANG=pt_BR
+
+# 'C' is the old Slackware (and UNIX) default, which is 127-bit
+# ASCII with a charmap setting of ANSI_X3.4-1968.  These days,
+# it's better to use en_US or another modern $LANG setting to
+# support extended character sets.
+#export LANG=C
+
+# There is also support for UTF-8 locales, but be aware that
+# some programs are not yet able to handle UTF-8 and will fail to
+# run properly.  In those cases, you can set LANG=C before
+# starting them.  Still, I'd avoid UTF unless you actually need it.
+#export LANG=en_US.UTF-8
+
+# Another option for en_US:
+#export LANG=en_US.ISO8859-1
+
+# One side effect of the newer locales is that the sort order
+# is no longer according to ASCII values, so the sort order will
+# change in many places.  Since this isn't usually expected and
+# can break scripts, we'll stick with traditional ASCII sorting.
+# If you'd prefer the sort algorithm that goes with your $LANG
+# setting, comment this out.
+export LC_COLLATE=C
+
+# End of /etc/profile.d/lang.sh
+
diff --git a/templates/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org b/templates/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org
new file mode 120000
index 0000000..7146afd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/openoffice.d/opt/OpenOffice.org
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+../opt2/OpenOffice.org
+\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/templates/openoffice.s/post-install.sh b/templates/openoffice.s/post-install.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..086c7a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/openoffice.s/post-install.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+echo running post-installation script for $1/$2 jail...
+
+# copia de arquivos
+cp -p /etc/passwd $1/$2/etc/
+cp -p /etc/group $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+
+# pos-instalacao
+mount -t proc proc $1/$2/proc
+chroot $1/$2 /sbin/ldconfig
+cd $1/$2 && exec ./var/log/scripts/glibc-zoneinfo-*
+umount $1/$2/proc
diff --git a/templates/openoffice.template b/templates/openoffice.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef3ae52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/openoffice.template
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+acpid: REC
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cups: REC
+cxxlibs: ADD
+devs: ADD
+etc: ADD
+a2ps
+bc
+enscript
+espgs
+etc
+findutils
+gawk
+gettext
+getty-ps
+gimp-print
+glibc
+glibc-i18n
+glibc-profile
+glibc-solibs
+glibc-zoneinfo
+grep
+gzip
+hpijs
+infozip
+ispell
+kbd
+kde-i18n-pt_BR
+kdebase
+kdelibs
+koffice-i18n-pt_BR
+less
+libart_lgpl
+libidn
+libmng
+pkgtools
+qt
+sed
+shadow
+sudo
+sysklogd
+sysvinit
+utempter
+util-linux
+x11
+x11-devel
+x11-fonts-100dpi
+x11-fonts-cyrillic
+x11-fonts-misc
+x11-fonts-scale
+x11-xdmx
+x11-xnest
+x11-xvfb
+openoffice-chroot
+openssl
diff --git a/templates/slackware.template b/templates/slackware.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3590c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/slackware.template
@@ -0,0 +1,566 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+acpid: REC
+apmd: REC
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cpio: ADD
+cups: REC
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+devs: ADD
+e2fsprogs: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+floppy: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+genpower: OPT
+gettext: REC
+getty-ps: OPT
+glibc-solibs: ADD
+glibc-zoneinfo: ADD
+gpm: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+hdparm: ADD
+hotplug: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+isapnptools: OPT
+jfsutils: OPT
+kbd: REC
+kernel-ide: REC
+kernel-modules: ADD
+less: ADD
+lilo: ADD
+loadlin: REC
+logrotate: ADD
+minicom: REC
+mkinitrd: REC
+module-init-tools: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pciutils: OPT
+pcmcia-cs: REC
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+reiserfsprogs: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+smartmontools: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+syslinux: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+tcsh: REC
+udev: ADD
+umsdos-progs: ADD
+usbutils: ADD
+utempter: REC
+util-linux: ADD
+xfsprogs: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+a2ps: REC
+acct: OPT
+alsa-utils: REC
+amp: OPT
+ash: OPT
+at: OPT
+aumix: OPT
+bc: OPT
+bpe: OPT
+cdparanoia: OPT
+cdrdao: OPT
+cdrtools: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+dvd+rw-tools: OPT
+enscript: OPT
+espgs: REC
+flac: OPT
+gimp-print: OPT
+groff: ADD
+gnu-gs-fonts: REC
+hpijs: REC
+ispell: OPT
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+ksh93: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+lvm: OPT
+madplay: OPT
+man: ADD
+man-pages: REC
+mc: OPT
+mdadm: OPT
+most: OPT
+mpg321: OPT
+mt-st: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+normalize: OPT
+quota: OPT
+raidtools: OPT
+rexima: REC
+rpm: OPT
+rzip: OPT
+sc: OPT
+screen: OPT
+seejpeg: REC
+sgml-tools: REC
+sox: REC
+sudo: OPT
+texinfo: REC
+vim: OPT
+vorbis-tools: OPT
+workbone: OPT
+zsh: OPT
+
+autoconf: OPT
+automake: OPT
+bin86: ADD
+binutils: ADD
+bison: ADD
+byacc: OPT
+ccache: OPT
+clisp: OPT
+cscope: OPT
+cvs: REC
+distcc: OPT
+doxygen: OPT
+flex: ADD
+gcc: ADD
+gcc-g++: REC
+gcc-g77: OPT
+gcc-gnat: OPT
+gcc-java: OPT
+gcc-objc: OPT
+gdb: REC
+gettext-tools: REC
+guile: OPT
+indent: OPT
+kernel-headers: ADD
+libtool: OPT
+m4: REC
+make: ADD
+nasm: OPT
+oprofile: OPT
+p2c: OPT
+perl: REC
+pkgconfig: REC
+pmake: REC
+python: OPT
+python-demo: OPT
+python-tools: OPT
+rcs: OPT
+strace: REC
+subversion: OPT
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+emacs: ADD
+emacs-misc: REC
+emacs-lisp: OPT
+emacs-leim: OPT
+emacs-nox: OPT
+emacs-info: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+linux-faqs: ADD
+linux-howtos: ADD
+kernel-source: REC
+aalib: REC
+alsa-driver: ADD
+alsa-lib: ADD
+alsa-oss: OPT
+arts: ADD
+aspell: REC
+aspell-en: REC
+atk: REC
+audiofile: REC
+db3: REC
+db31: REC
+db4: REC
+esound: REC
+expat: REC
+fribidi: REC
+gdbm: REC
+gdk-pixbuf: REC
+glib: REC
+glib2: REC
+glibc: REC
+glibc-i18n: OPT
+glibc-profile: OPT
+glut: REC
+gmp: REC
+gnet: REC
+gtk+: REC
+gtk+2: REC
+imlib: REC
+jre: OPT
+lcms: REC
+lesstif: REC
+libao: REC
+libart_lgpl: REC
+libcaca: OPT
+libexif: REC
+libglade: REC
+libgsf: REC
+libgtkhtml: REC
+libid3tag: REC
+libidl: REC
+libidn: REC
+libieee1284: REC
+libjpeg: REC
+libmad: REC
+libmikmod: REC
+libmng: REC
+libogg: REC
+libpng: REC
+librsvg: REC
+libtermcap: REC
+libtiff: REC
+libungif: REC
+libusb: REC
+libvorbis: REC
+libwmf: REC
+libwmf-docs: OPT
+libwpd: REC
+libxml2: REC
+libxslt: REC
+mhash: REC
+mpeg_lib: OPT
+ncurses: REC
+netpbm: REC
+pango: REC
+pcre: REC
+pilot-link: REC
+popt: REC
+readline: REC
+sdl: REC
+shared-mime-info: REC
+slang: REC
+startup-notification: ADD
+svgalib: REC
+t1lib: REC
+taglib: REC
+wv2: REC
+xaw3d: REC
+zlib: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+autofs: OPT
+bind: REC
+bitchx: OPT
+bootp: OPT
+curl: OPT
+cyrus-sasl: REC
+dhcp: OPT
+dhcpcd: REC
+dnsmasq: OPT
+elm: OPT
+epic4: OPT
+fetchmail: OPT
+getmail: REC
+gnupg: OPT
+htdig: OPT
+imapd: OPT
+inetd: REC
+iproute2: OPT
+iptables: ADD
+iptraf: OPT
+irssi: OPT
+lftp: OPT
+links: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+metamail: REC
+mod_ssl: OPT
+mutt: OPT
+nail: REC
+nc: OPT
+ncftp: OPT
+netatalk: OPT
+netpipes: OPT
+netwatch: OPT
+newspost: OPT
+nfs-utils: OPT
+nmap: OPT
+nn: OPT
+ntp: OPT
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+pidentd: REC
+pine: OPT
+popa3d: REC
+portmap: REC
+ppp: OPT
+procmail: REC
+proftpd: OPT
+rdist: OPT
+rp-pppoe: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+samba: OPT
+sendmail-cf: OPT
+sendmail: REC
+slrn: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpdump: REC
+tcpip: REC
+tin: OPT
+traceroute: OPT
+trn: OPT
+uucp: OPT
+vsftpd: REC
+wget: OPT
+whois: OPT
+wireless-tools: OPT
+yptools: OPT
+ytalk: OPT
+tetex: ADD
+tetex-doc: REC
+xfig: OPT
+transfig: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+expect: OPT
+hfsutils: OPT
+tcl:  ADD
+tk:   REC
+tclx: REC
+tix: OPT
+x11: ADD
+x11-devel: ADD
+x11-docs: REC
+x11-docs-html: OPT
+x11-fonts-100dpi: OPT
+x11-fonts-cyrillic: OPT
+x11-fonts-misc: ADD
+x11-fonts-scale: ADD
+x11-xdmx: OPT
+x11-xnest: OPT
+x11-xvfb: OPT
+abiword: OPT
+blackbox: OPT
+fluxbox: OPT
+fvwm: REC
+gaim: OPT
+gftp: OPT
+gimp: REC
+gimp-help-2: REC
+gkrellm: OPT
+gnuchess: REC
+gnuplot: OPT
+gucharmap: OPT
+gv: REC
+gxine: OPT
+imagemagick: REC
+mozilla: REC
+mozilla-firefox: REC
+mozilla-thunderbird: REC
+pan: REC
+rxvt: REC
+sane: OPT
+seyon: OPT
+windowmaker: REC
+x3270: OPT
+xchat: OPT
+xfce: OPT
+xfm: OPT
+xfractint: OPT
+xgames: REC
+xine-lib: REC
+xine-ui: REC
+xpaint: OPT
+xpdf: OPT
+xmms: OPT
+xsane: OPT
+xlockmore: REC
+xscreensaver: REC
+xv: REC
+xvim: REC
+xxgdb: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+bsd-games: OPT
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7115d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1046 @@
+##
+## httpd.conf -- Apache HTTP server configuration file
+##
+
+#
+# Based upon the NCSA server configuration files originally by Rob McCool.
+#
+# This is the main Apache server configuration file.  It contains the
+# configuration directives that give the server its instructions.
+# See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/> for detailed information about
+# the directives.
+#
+# Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding
+# what they do.  They're here only as hints or reminders.  If you are unsure
+# consult the online docs. You have been warned.  
+#
+# After this file is processed, the server will look for and process
+# /etc/apache/srm.conf and then /etc/apache/access.conf
+# unless you have overridden these with ResourceConfig and/or
+# AccessConfig directives here.
+#
+# The configuration directives are grouped into three basic sections:
+#  1. Directives that control the operation of the Apache server process as a
+#     whole (the 'global environment').
+#  2. Directives that define the parameters of the 'main' or 'default' server,
+#     which responds to requests that aren't handled by a virtual host.
+#     These directives also provide default values for the settings
+#     of all virtual hosts.
+#  3. Settings for virtual hosts, which allow Web requests to be sent to
+#     different IP addresses or hostnames and have them handled by the
+#     same Apache server process.
+#
+# Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many
+# of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the
+# server will use that explicit path.  If the filenames do *not* begin
+# with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log"
+# with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache" will be interpreted by the
+# server as "/usr/local/apache/logs/foo.log".
+#
+
+### Section 1: Global Environment
+#
+# The directives in this section affect the overall operation of Apache,
+# such as the number of concurrent requests it can handle or where it
+# can find its configuration files.
+#
+
+#
+# ServerType is either inetd, or standalone.  Inetd mode is only supported on
+# Unix platforms.
+#
+ServerType standalone
+
+# ServerTokens directive
+ServerTokens ProductOnly
+
+#
+# ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's
+# configuration, error, and log files are kept.
+#
+# NOTE!  If you intend to place this on an NFS (or otherwise network)
+# mounted filesystem then please read the LockFile documentation
+# (available at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/mod/core.html#lockfile>);
+# you will save yourself a lot of trouble.
+#
+ServerRoot "/usr"
+
+#
+# The LockFile directive sets the path to the lockfile used when Apache
+# is compiled with either USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT or
+# USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT. This directive should normally be left at
+# its default value. The main reason for changing it is if the logs
+# directory is NFS mounted, since the lockfile MUST BE STORED ON A LOCAL
+# DISK. The PID of the main server process is automatically appended to
+# the filename. 
+#
+#LockFile /var/run/httpd.lock
+
+#
+# PidFile: The file in which the server should record its process
+# identification number when it starts.
+#
+PidFile /var/run/httpd.pid
+
+#
+# ScoreBoardFile: File used to store internal server process information.
+# Not all architectures require this.  But if yours does (you'll know because
+# this file will be  created when you run Apache) then you *must* ensure that
+# no two invocations of Apache share the same scoreboard file.
+#
+ScoreBoardFile /var/run/httpd.scoreboard
+
+#
+# In the standard configuration, the server will process httpd.conf (this 
+# file, specified by the -f command line option), srm.conf, and access.conf 
+# in that order.  The latter two files are now distributed empty, as it is 
+# recommended that all directives be kept in a single file for simplicity.  
+# The commented-out values below are the built-in defaults.  You can have the 
+# server ignore these files altogether by using "/dev/null" (for Unix) or
+# "nul" (for Win32) for the arguments to the directives.
+#
+#ResourceConfig /etc/apache/srm.conf
+#AccessConfig /etc/apache/access.conf
+
+#
+# Timeout: The number of seconds before receives and sends time out.
+#
+Timeout 300
+
+#
+# KeepAlive: Whether or not to allow persistent connections (more than
+# one request per connection). Set to "Off" to deactivate.
+#
+KeepAlive On
+
+#
+# MaxKeepAliveRequests: The maximum number of requests to allow
+# during a persistent connection. Set to 0 to allow an unlimited amount.
+# We recommend you leave this number high, for maximum performance.
+#
+MaxKeepAliveRequests 100
+
+#
+# KeepAliveTimeout: Number of seconds to wait for the next request from the
+# same client on the same connection.
+#
+KeepAliveTimeout 2
+
+#
+# Server-pool size regulation.  Rather than making you guess how many
+# server processes you need, Apache dynamically adapts to the load it
+# sees --- that is, it tries to maintain enough server processes to
+# handle the current load, plus a few spare servers to handle transient
+# load spikes (e.g., multiple simultaneous requests from a single
+# Netscape browser).
+#
+# It does this by periodically checking how many servers are waiting
+# for a request.  If there are fewer than MinSpareServers, it creates
+# a new spare.  If there are more than MaxSpareServers, some of the
+# spares die off.  The default values are probably OK for most sites.
+#
+MinSpareServers 5
+MaxSpareServers 10
+
+#
+# Number of servers to start initially --- should be a reasonable ballpark
+# figure.
+#
+StartServers 5
+
+#
+# Limit on total number of servers running, i.e., limit on the number
+# of clients who can simultaneously connect --- if this limit is ever
+# reached, clients will be LOCKED OUT, so it should NOT BE SET TOO LOW.
+# It is intended mainly as a brake to keep a runaway server from taking
+# the system with it as it spirals down...
+#
+MaxClients 150
+
+#
+# MaxRequestsPerChild: the number of requests each child process is
+# allowed to process before the child dies.  The child will exit so
+# as to avoid problems after prolonged use when Apache (and maybe the
+# libraries it uses) leak memory or other resources.  On most systems, this
+# isn't really needed, but a few (such as Solaris) do have notable leaks
+# in the libraries. For these platforms, set to something like 10000
+# or so; a setting of 0 means unlimited.
+#
+# NOTE: This value does not include keepalive requests after the initial
+#       request per connection. For example, if a child process handles
+#       an initial request and 10 subsequent "keptalive" requests, it
+#       would only count as 1 request towards this limit.
+#
+MaxRequestsPerChild 0
+
+#
+# Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or
+# ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost>
+# directive.
+#
+#Listen 3000
+#Listen 12.34.56.78:80
+
+#
+# BindAddress: You can support virtual hosts with this option. This directive
+# is used to tell the server which IP address to listen to. It can either
+# contain "*", an IP address, or a fully qualified Internet domain name.
+# See also the <VirtualHost> and Listen directives.
+#
+#BindAddress *
+
+#
+# Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support
+#
+# To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you
+# have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the
+# directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used.
+# Please read the file http://httpd.apache.org/docs/dso.html for more
+# details about the DSO mechanism and run `httpd -l' for the list of already
+# built-in (statically linked and thus always available) modules in your httpd
+# binary.
+#
+# Note: The order in which modules are loaded is important.  Don't change
+# the order below without expert advice.
+#
+# Example:
+# LoadModule foo_module libexec/mod_foo.so
+LoadModule vhost_alias_module libexec/apache/mod_vhost_alias.so
+#LoadModule env_module         libexec/apache/mod_env.so
+LoadModule define_module      libexec/apache/mod_define.so
+LoadModule config_log_module  libexec/apache/mod_log_config.so
+LoadModule mime_magic_module  libexec/apache/mod_mime_magic.so
+LoadModule mime_module        libexec/apache/mod_mime.so
+LoadModule negotiation_module libexec/apache/mod_negotiation.so
+#LoadModule status_module      libexec/apache/mod_status.so
+#LoadModule info_module        libexec/apache/mod_info.so
+LoadModule includes_module    libexec/apache/mod_include.so
+LoadModule autoindex_module   libexec/apache/mod_autoindex.so
+LoadModule dir_module         libexec/apache/mod_dir.so
+LoadModule cgi_module         libexec/apache/mod_cgi.so
+#LoadModule asis_module        libexec/apache/mod_asis.so
+#LoadModule imap_module        libexec/apache/mod_imap.so
+#LoadModule action_module      libexec/apache/mod_actions.so
+#LoadModule speling_module     libexec/apache/mod_speling.so
+#LoadModule userdir_module     libexec/apache/mod_userdir.so
+LoadModule alias_module       libexec/apache/mod_alias.so
+LoadModule rewrite_module     libexec/apache/mod_rewrite.so
+LoadModule access_module      libexec/apache/mod_access.so
+LoadModule auth_module        libexec/apache/mod_auth.so
+LoadModule anon_auth_module   libexec/apache/mod_auth_anon.so
+#LoadModule dbm_auth_module    libexec/apache/mod_auth_dbm.so
+#LoadModule digest_module      libexec/apache/mod_digest.so
+LoadModule proxy_module       libexec/apache/libproxy.so
+LoadModule cern_meta_module   libexec/apache/mod_cern_meta.so
+LoadModule expires_module     libexec/apache/mod_expires.so
+LoadModule headers_module     libexec/apache/mod_headers.so
+#LoadModule usertrack_module   libexec/apache/mod_usertrack.so
+#LoadModule log_forensic_module libexec/apache/mod_log_forensic.so
+#LoadModule unique_id_module   libexec/apache/mod_unique_id.so
+LoadModule setenvif_module    libexec/apache/mod_setenvif.so
+
+#  Reconstruction of the complete module list from all available modules
+#  (static and shared ones) to achieve correct module execution order.
+#  [WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE LOADMODULE SECTION ABOVE UPDATE THIS, TOO]
+ClearModuleList
+AddModule mod_vhost_alias.c
+#AddModule mod_env.c
+AddModule mod_define.c
+AddModule mod_log_config.c
+AddModule mod_mime_magic.c
+AddModule mod_mime.c
+AddModule mod_negotiation.c
+#AddModule mod_status.c
+#AddModule mod_info.c
+AddModule mod_include.c
+AddModule mod_autoindex.c
+AddModule mod_dir.c
+AddModule mod_cgi.c
+#AddModule mod_asis.c
+#AddModule mod_imap.c
+#AddModule mod_actions.c
+#AddModule mod_speling.c
+#AddModule mod_userdir.c
+AddModule mod_alias.c
+AddModule mod_rewrite.c
+AddModule mod_access.c
+AddModule mod_auth.c
+AddModule mod_auth_anon.c
+#AddModule mod_auth_dbm.c
+#AddModule mod_digest.c
+AddModule mod_proxy.c
+AddModule mod_cern_meta.c
+AddModule mod_expires.c
+AddModule mod_headers.c
+#AddModule mod_usertrack.c
+#AddModule mod_log_forensic.c
+#AddModule mod_unique_id.c
+AddModule mod_so.c
+AddModule mod_setenvif.c
+
+#
+# ExtendedStatus controls whether Apache will generate "full" status
+# information (ExtendedStatus On) or just basic information (ExtendedStatus
+# Off) when the "server-status" handler is called. The default is Off.
+#
+#ExtendedStatus On
+
+### Section 2: 'Main' server configuration
+#
+# The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main'
+# server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a
+# <VirtualHost> definition.  These values also provide defaults for
+# any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file.
+#
+# All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers,
+# in which case these default settings will be overridden for the
+# virtual host being defined.
+#
+
+#
+# If your ServerType directive (set earlier in the 'Global Environment'
+# section) is set to "inetd", the next few directives don't have any
+# effect since their settings are defined by the inetd configuration.
+# Skip ahead to the ServerAdmin directive.
+#
+
+#
+# Port: The port to which the standalone server listens. For
+# ports < 1023, you will need httpd to be run as root initially.
+#
+Port 80
+
+#
+# If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run
+# httpd as root initially and it will switch.  
+#
+# User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as.
+#  . On SCO (ODT 3) use "User nouser" and "Group nogroup".
+#  . On HPUX you may not be able to use shared memory as nobody, and the
+#    suggested workaround is to create a user www and use that user.
+#  NOTE that some kernels refuse to setgid(Group) or semctl(IPC_SET)
+#  when the value of (unsigned)Group is above 60000; 
+#  don't use Group "#-1" on these systems!
+#
+User nobody
+Group nobody
+
+#
+# ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be
+# e-mailed.  This address appears on some server-generated pages, such
+# as error documents.
+#
+ServerAdmin root@midas.slackware.lan
+
+#
+# ServerName allows you to set a host name which is sent back to clients for
+# your server if it's different than the one the program would get (i.e., use
+# "www" instead of the host's real name).
+#
+# Note: You cannot just invent host names and hope they work. The name you 
+# define here must be a valid DNS name for your host. If you don't understand
+# this, ask your network administrator.
+# If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here.
+# You will have to access it by its address (e.g., http://123.45.67.89/)
+# anyway, and this will make redirections work in a sensible way.
+#
+# 127.0.0.1 is the TCP/IP local loop-back address, often named localhost. Your 
+# machine always knows itself by this address. If you use Apache strictly for 
+# local testing and development, you may use 127.0.0.1 as the server name.
+#
+#ServerName www.example.com
+
+#
+# DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your
+# documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but
+# symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations.
+#
+DocumentRoot "/var/www/htdocs"
+
+#
+# Each directory to which Apache has access, can be configured with respect
+# to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that
+# directory (and its subdirectories). 
+#
+# First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of 
+# permissions.  
+#
+<Directory />
+    Options FollowSymLinks
+    AllowOverride None
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow
+# particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as
+# you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it
+# below.
+#
+
+#
+# This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to.
+#
+<Directory "/var/www/htdocs">
+
+#
+# This may also be "None", "All", or any combination of "Indexes",
+# "Includes", "FollowSymLinks", "ExecCGI", or "MultiViews".
+#
+# Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All"
+# doesn't give it to you.
+#
+    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+
+#
+# This controls which options the .htaccess files in directories can
+# override. Can also be "All", or any combination of "Options", "FileInfo", 
+# "AuthConfig", and "Limit"
+#
+    AllowOverride None
+
+#
+# Controls who can get stuff from this server.
+#
+    Order allow,deny
+    Allow from all
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# UserDir: The name of the directory which is appended onto a user's home
+# directory if a ~user request is received.
+#
+<IfModule mod_userdir.c>
+    UserDir public_html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# Control access to UserDir directories.  The following is an example
+# for a site where these directories are restricted to read-only.
+#
+#<Directory /home/*/public_html>
+#    AllowOverride FileInfo AuthConfig Limit
+#    Options MultiViews Indexes SymLinksIfOwnerMatch IncludesNoExec
+#    <Limit GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order allow,deny
+#        Allow from all
+#    </Limit>
+#    <LimitExcept GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order deny,allow
+#        Deny from all
+#    </LimitExcept>
+#</Directory>
+
+#
+# DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written HTML
+# directory index.  Separate multiple entries with spaces.
+#
+<IfModule mod_dir.c>
+    DirectoryIndex index.html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# AccessFileName: The name of the file to look for in each directory
+# for access control information.
+#
+AccessFileName .htaccess
+
+#
+# The following lines prevent .htaccess files from being viewed by
+# Web clients.  Since .htaccess files often contain authorization
+# information, access is disallowed for security reasons.  Comment
+# these lines out if you want Web visitors to see the contents of
+# .htaccess files.  If you change the AccessFileName directive above,
+# be sure to make the corresponding changes here.
+#
+# Also, folks tend to use names such as .htpasswd for password
+# files, so this will protect those as well.
+#
+<Files ~ "^\.ht">
+    Order allow,deny
+    Deny from all
+    Satisfy All
+</Files>
+
+#
+# CacheNegotiatedDocs: By default, Apache sends "Pragma: no-cache" with each
+# document that was negotiated on the basis of content. This asks proxy
+# servers not to cache the document. Uncommenting the following line disables
+# this behavior, and proxies will be allowed to cache the documents.
+#
+#CacheNegotiatedDocs
+
+#
+# UseCanonicalName:  (new for 1.3)  With this setting turned on, whenever
+# Apache needs to construct a self-referencing URL (a URL that refers back
+# to the server the response is coming from) it will use ServerName and
+# Port to form a "canonical" name.  With this setting off, Apache will
+# use the hostname:port that the client supplied, when possible.  This
+# also affects SERVER_NAME and SERVER_PORT in CGI scripts.
+#
+UseCanonicalName On
+
+#
+# TypesConfig describes where the mime.types file (or equivalent) is
+# to be found.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+    TypesConfig /etc/apache/mime.types
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# DefaultType is the default MIME type the server will use for a document
+# if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions.
+# If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is
+# a good value.  If most of your content is binary, such as applications
+# or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to
+# keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are
+# text.
+#
+DefaultType text/plain
+
+#
+# The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the
+# contents of the file itself to determine its type.  The MIMEMagicFile
+# directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located.
+# mod_mime_magic is not part of the default server (you have to add
+# it yourself with a LoadModule [see the DSO paragraph in the 'Global
+# Environment' section], or recompile the server and include mod_mime_magic
+# as part of the configuration), so it's enclosed in an <IfModule> container.
+# This means that the MIMEMagicFile directive will only be processed if the
+# module is part of the server.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime_magic.c>
+    MIMEMagicFile /etc/apache/magic
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# HostnameLookups: Log the names of clients or just their IP addresses
+# e.g., www.apache.org (on) or 204.62.129.132 (off).
+# The default is off because it'd be overall better for the net if people
+# had to knowingly turn this feature on, since enabling it means that
+# each client request will result in AT LEAST one lookup request to the
+# nameserver.
+#
+HostnameLookups Off
+
+#
+# ErrorLog: The location of the error log file.
+# If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be
+# logged here.  If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost>
+# container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here.
+#
+ErrorLog "| /usr/bin/error-log.sh /var/log/apache/error_log"
+
+#
+# LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log.
+# Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit,
+# alert, emerg.
+#
+LogLevel warn
+
+#
+# The following directives define some format nicknames for use with
+# a CustomLog directive (see below).
+#
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common
+LogFormat "%{Referer}i -> %U" referer
+LogFormat "%{User-agent}i" agent
+
+#
+# The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format).
+# If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, they will be logged here.  Contrariwise, if you *do*
+# define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be
+# logged therein and *not* in this file.
+#
+CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log common
+
+#
+# If you would like to have agent and referer logfiles, uncomment the
+# following directives.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/referer_log referer
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/agent_log agent
+
+#
+# If you prefer a single logfile with access, agent, and referer information
+# (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log combined
+
+#
+# Optionally add a line containing the server version and virtual host
+# name to server-generated pages (error documents, FTP directory listings,
+# mod_status and mod_info output etc., but not CGI generated documents).
+# Set to "EMail" to also include a mailto: link to the ServerAdmin.
+# Set to one of:  On | Off | EMail
+#
+ServerSignature Off
+
+# EBCDIC configuration:
+# (only for mainframes using the EBCDIC codeset, currently one of:
+# Fujitsu-Siemens' BS2000/OSD, IBM's OS/390 and IBM's TPF)!!
+# The following default configuration assumes that "text files"
+# are stored in EBCDIC (so that you can operate on them using the
+# normal POSIX tools like grep and sort) while "binary files" are
+# stored with identical octets as on an ASCII machine.
+#
+# The directives are evaluated in configuration file order, with
+# the EBCDICConvert directives applied before EBCDICConvertByType.
+#
+# If you want to have ASCII HTML documents and EBCDIC HTML documents
+# at the same time, you can use the file extension to force
+# conversion off for the ASCII documents:
+# > AddType       text/html .ahtml
+# > EBCDICConvert Off=InOut .ahtml
+#
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut text/* message/* multipart/*
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=In    application/x-www-form-urlencoded
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut application/postscript model/vrml
+# EBCDICConvertByType Off=InOut */*
+
+
+#
+# Aliases: Add here as many aliases as you need (with no limit). The format is 
+# Alias fakename realname
+#
+<IfModule mod_alias.c>
+
+    #
+    # Note that if you include a trailing / on fakename then the server will
+    # require it to be present in the URL.  So "/icons" isn't aliased in this
+    # example, only "/icons/".  If the fakename is slash-terminated, then the 
+    # realname must also be slash terminated, and if the fakename omits the 
+    # trailing slash, the realname must also omit it.
+    #
+    Alias /icons/ "/var/www/icons/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/icons">
+        Options Indexes MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    # This Alias will project the on-line documentation tree under /manual/
+    # even if you change the DocumentRoot. Comment it if you don't want to 
+    # provide access to the on-line documentation.
+    #
+    Alias /manual/ "/var/www/htdocs/manual/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/htdocs/manual">
+        Options Indexes FollowSymlinks MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    #
+    # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts.
+    # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that
+    # documents in the realname directory are treated as applications and
+    # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the client.
+    # The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias directives as to
+    # Alias.
+    #
+    ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/var/www/cgi-bin/"
+
+    #
+    # "/var/www/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased
+    # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured.
+    #
+    <Directory "/var/www/cgi-bin">
+        AllowOverride None
+        Options None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of aliases.
+
+#
+# Redirect allows you to tell clients about documents which used to exist in
+# your server's namespace, but do not anymore. This allows you to tell the
+# clients where to look for the relocated document.
+# Format: Redirect old-URI new-URL
+#
+
+#
+# Directives controlling the display of server-generated directory listings.
+#
+<IfModule mod_autoindex.c>
+
+    #
+    # FancyIndexing is whether you want fancy directory indexing or standard
+    #
+    IndexOptions FancyIndexing
+
+    #
+    # AddIcon* directives tell the server which icon to show for different
+    # files or filename extensions.  These are only displayed for
+    # FancyIndexed directories.
+    #
+    AddIconByEncoding (CMP,/icons/compressed.gif) x-compress x-gzip
+
+    AddIconByType (TXT,/icons/text.gif) text/*
+    AddIconByType (IMG,/icons/image2.gif) image/*
+    AddIconByType (SND,/icons/sound2.gif) audio/*
+    AddIconByType (VID,/icons/movie.gif) video/*
+
+    AddIcon /icons/binary.gif .bin .exe
+    AddIcon /icons/binhex.gif .hqx
+    AddIcon /icons/tar.gif .tar
+    AddIcon /icons/world2.gif .wrl .wrl.gz .vrml .vrm .iv
+    AddIcon /icons/compressed.gif .Z .z .tgz .gz .zip
+    AddIcon /icons/a.gif .ps .ai .eps
+    AddIcon /icons/layout.gif .html .shtml .htm .pdf
+    AddIcon /icons/text.gif .txt
+    AddIcon /icons/c.gif .c
+    AddIcon /icons/p.gif .pl .py
+    AddIcon /icons/f.gif .for
+    AddIcon /icons/dvi.gif .dvi
+    AddIcon /icons/uuencoded.gif .uu
+    AddIcon /icons/script.gif .conf .sh .shar .csh .ksh .tcl
+    AddIcon /icons/tex.gif .tex
+    AddIcon /icons/bomb.gif core
+
+    AddIcon /icons/back.gif ..
+    AddIcon /icons/hand.right.gif README
+    AddIcon /icons/folder.gif ^^DIRECTORY^^
+    AddIcon /icons/blank.gif ^^BLANKICON^^
+
+    #
+    # DefaultIcon is which icon to show for files which do not have an icon
+    # explicitly set.
+    #
+    DefaultIcon /icons/unknown.gif
+
+    #
+    # AddDescription allows you to place a short description after a file in
+    # server-generated indexes.  These are only displayed for FancyIndexed
+    # directories.
+    # Format: AddDescription "description" filename
+    #
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed document" .gz
+    #AddDescription "tar archive" .tar
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed tar archive" .tgz
+
+    #
+    # ReadmeName is the name of the README file the server will look for by
+    # default, and append to directory listings.
+    #
+    # HeaderName is the name of a file which should be prepended to
+    # directory indexes. 
+    #
+    ReadmeName README.html
+    HeaderName HEADER.html
+
+    #
+    # IndexIgnore is a set of filenames which directory indexing should ignore
+    # and not include in the listing.  Shell-style wildcarding is permitted.
+    #
+    IndexIgnore .??* *~ *# HEADER* README* RCS CVS *,v *,t
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of indexing directives.
+
+#
+# Document types.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+
+    #
+    # AddLanguage allows you to specify the language of a document. You can
+    # then use content negotiation to give a browser a file in a language
+    # it can understand.  
+    #
+    # Note 1: The suffix does not have to be the same as the language 
+    # keyword --- those with documents in Polish (whose net-standard 
+    # language code is pl) may wish to use "AddLanguage pl .po" to 
+    # avoid the ambiguity with the common suffix for perl scripts.
+    #
+    # Note 2: The example entries below illustrate that in quite
+    # some cases the two character 'Language' abbreviation is not
+    # identical to the two character 'Country' code for its country,
+    # E.g. 'Danmark/dk' versus 'Danish/da'.
+    #
+    # Note 3: In the case of 'ltz' we violate the RFC by using a three char 
+    # specifier. But there is 'work in progress' to fix this and get 
+    # the reference data for rfc1766 cleaned up.
+    #
+    # Danish (da) - Dutch (nl) - English (en) - Estonian (ee)
+    # French (fr) - German (de) - Greek-Modern (el)
+    # Italian (it) - Korean (kr) - Norwegian (no) - Norwegian Nynorsk (nn)
+    # Portugese (pt) - Luxembourgeois* (ltz)
+    # Spanish (es) - Swedish (sv) - Catalan (ca) - Czech(cs)
+    # Polish (pl) - Brazilian Portuguese (pt-br) - Japanese (ja)
+    # Russian (ru)
+    #
+    AddLanguage da .dk
+    AddLanguage nl .nl
+    AddLanguage en .en
+    AddLanguage et .ee
+    AddLanguage fr .fr
+    AddLanguage de .de
+    AddLanguage el .el
+    AddLanguage he .he
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-8 .iso8859-8
+    AddLanguage it .it
+    AddLanguage ja .ja
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-JP .jis
+    AddLanguage kr .kr
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-KR .iso-kr
+    AddLanguage nn .nn
+    AddLanguage no .no
+    AddLanguage pl .po
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-2 .iso-pl
+    AddLanguage pt .pt
+    AddLanguage pt-br .pt-br
+    AddLanguage ltz .lu
+    AddLanguage ca .ca
+    AddLanguage es .es
+    AddLanguage sv .sv
+    AddLanguage cs .cz .cs
+    AddLanguage ru .ru
+    AddLanguage zh-TW .zh-tw
+    AddCharset Big5         .Big5    .big5
+    AddCharset WINDOWS-1251 .cp-1251
+    AddCharset CP866        .cp866
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-5   .iso-ru
+    AddCharset KOI8-R       .koi8-r
+    AddCharset UCS-2        .ucs2
+    AddCharset UCS-4        .ucs4
+    AddCharset UTF-8        .utf8
+
+    # LanguagePriority allows you to give precedence to some languages
+    # in case of a tie during content negotiation.
+    #
+    # Just list the languages in decreasing order of preference. We have
+    # more or less alphabetized them here. You probably want to change this.
+    #
+    <IfModule mod_negotiation.c>
+        LanguagePriority en da nl et fr de el it ja kr no pl pt pt-br ru ltz ca es sv tw
+    </IfModule>
+
+    #
+    # AddType allows you to tweak mime.types without actually editing it, or to
+    # make certain files to be certain types.
+    #
+    AddType application/x-tar .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress
+    # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this.
+    # Despite the name similarity, the following Add* directives have nothing
+    # to do with the FancyIndexing customization directives above.
+    #
+    AddEncoding x-compress .Z
+    AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz
+    #
+    # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you
+    # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types:
+    #
+    #AddType application/x-compress .Z
+    #AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers",
+    # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server
+    # or added with the Action command (see below)
+    #
+    # If you want to use server side includes, or CGI outside
+    # ScriptAliased directories, uncomment the following lines.
+    #
+    # To use CGI scripts:
+    #
+    #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
+
+    #
+    # To use server-parsed HTML files
+    #
+    #AddType text/html .shtml
+    #AddHandler server-parsed .shtml
+
+    #
+    # Uncomment the following line to enable Apache's send-asis HTTP file
+    # feature
+    #
+    #AddHandler send-as-is asis
+
+    #
+    # If you wish to use server-parsed imagemap files, use
+    #
+    #AddHandler imap-file map
+
+    #
+    # To enable type maps, you might want to use
+    #
+    #AddHandler type-map var
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of document types.
+
+#
+# Action lets you define media types that will execute a script whenever
+# a matching file is called. This eliminates the need for repeated URL
+# pathnames for oft-used CGI file processors.
+# Format: Action media/type /cgi-script/location
+# Format: Action handler-name /cgi-script/location
+#
+
+#
+# MetaDir: specifies the name of the directory in which Apache can find
+# meta information files. These files contain additional HTTP headers
+# to include when sending the document
+#
+#MetaDir .web
+
+#
+# MetaSuffix: specifies the file name suffix for the file containing the
+# meta information.
+#
+#MetaSuffix .meta
+
+#
+# Customizable error response (Apache style)
+#  these come in three flavors
+#
+#    1) plain text
+ErrorDocument 500 /missing.html
+#  n.b.  the single leading (") marks it as text, it does not get output
+#
+#    2) local redirects
+ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html
+#  to redirect to local URL /missing.html
+#ErrorDocument 404 /cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl
+#  N.B.: You can redirect to a script or a document using server-side-includes.
+#
+#    3) external redirects
+ErrorDocument 402 /missing.html
+#  N.B.: Many of the environment variables associated with the original
+#  request will *not* be available to such a script.
+
+#
+# Customize behaviour based on the browser
+#
+<IfModule mod_setenvif.c>
+
+    #
+    # The following directives modify normal HTTP response behavior.
+    # The first directive disables keepalive for Netscape 2.x and browsers that
+    # spoof it. There are known problems with these browser implementations.
+    # The second directive is for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0b2
+    # which has a broken HTTP/1.1 implementation and does not properly
+    # support keepalive when it is used on 301 or 302 (redirect) responses.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "Mozilla/2" nokeepalive
+    BrowserMatch "MSIE 4\.0b2;" nokeepalive downgrade-1.0 force-response-1.0
+
+    #
+    # The following directive disables HTTP/1.1 responses to browsers which
+    # are in violation of the HTTP/1.0 spec by not being able to grok a
+    # basic 1.1 response.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "RealPlayer 4\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "Java/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "JDK/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of browser customization directives
+
+#
+# Allow server status reports, with the URL of http://servername/server-status
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-status>
+#    SetHandler server-status
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# Allow remote server configuration reports, with the URL of
+# http://servername/server-info (requires that mod_info.c be loaded).
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-info>
+#    SetHandler server-info
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# There have been reports of people trying to abuse an old bug from pre-1.1
+# days.  This bug involved a CGI script distributed as a part of Apache.
+# By uncommenting these lines you can redirect these attacks to a logging 
+# script on phf.apache.org.  Or, you can record them yourself, using the script
+# support/phf_abuse_log.cgi.
+#
+#<Location /cgi-bin/phf*>
+#    Deny from all
+#    ErrorDocument 403 http://phf.apache.org/phf_abuse_log.cgi
+#</Location>
+
+### Section 3: Virtual Hosts
+#
+# VirtualHost: If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your
+# machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations
+# use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about
+# IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below.
+#
+# Please see the documentation at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/vhosts/>
+# for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts.
+#
+# You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host
+# configuration.
+
+#
+# Use name-based virtual hosting.
+#
+#NameVirtualHost *:80
+
+#
+# VirtualHost example:
+# Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container.
+# The first VirtualHost section is used for requests without a known
+# server name.
+#
+#<VirtualHost *:80>
+#    ServerAdmin webmaster@dummy-host.example.com
+#    DocumentRoot /www/docs/dummy-host.example.com
+#    ServerName dummy-host.example.com
+#    ErrorLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log
+#    CustomLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log common
+#</VirtualHost>
+
+# By default, all external Apache modules are disabled.  To enable a particular
+# module for Apache, make sure the necessary packages are installed.  Then
+# uncomment the appropriate Include line below, save the file, and restart
+# Apache.  Note that some modules may need additional configuration steps.  For
+# example, mod_ssl requires a site certificate which you may need to generate.
+#
+# Lastly, if you remove a module package, be sure to edit this file and comment
+# out the appropriate Include line.
+
+# ==> mod_php configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  openssl-solibs (A series) and/or openssl (N series),
+#                     mysql (AP series), gmp (L series), mhash (L series),
+#                     and apache (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_php.conf
+
+# ==> mod_ssl configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  apache (N series) and openssl (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_ssl.conf
+
+#NameVirtualHost VSERVER_IP
+
+Include /etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6cddef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/php.ini
@@ -0,0 +1,1122 @@
+[PHP]
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; About this file ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; This is the recommended, PHP 4-style version of the php.ini-dist file.  It
+; sets some non standard settings, that make PHP more efficient, more secure,
+; and encourage cleaner coding.
+; The price is that with these settings, PHP may be incompatible with some
+; applications, and sometimes, more difficult to develop with.  Using this
+; file is warmly recommended for production sites.  As all of the changes from
+; the standard settings are thoroughly documented, you can go over each one,
+; and decide whether you want to use it or not.
+;
+; For general information about the php.ini file, please consult the php.ini-dist
+; file, included in your PHP distribution.
+;
+; This file is different from the php.ini-dist file in the fact that it features
+; different values for several directives, in order to improve performance, while
+; possibly breaking compatibility with the standard out-of-the-box behavior of
+; PHP 3.  Please make sure you read what's different, and modify your scripts
+; accordingly, if you decide to use this file instead.
+;
+; - register_globals = Off         [Security, Performance]
+;     Global variables are no longer registered for input data (POST, GET, cookies,
+;     environment and other server variables).  Instead of using $foo, you must use
+;     you can use $_REQUEST["foo"] (includes any variable that arrives through the
+;     request, namely, POST, GET and cookie variables), or use one of the specific
+;     $_GET["foo"], $_POST["foo"], $_COOKIE["foo"] or $_FILES["foo"], depending
+;     on where the input originates.  Also, you can look at the
+;     import_request_variables() function.
+;     Note that register_globals is going to be depracated (i.e., turned off by
+;     default) in the next version of PHP, because it often leads to security bugs.
+;     Read http://php.net/manual/en/security.registerglobals.php for further
+;     information.
+; - display_errors = Off           [Security]
+;     With this directive set to off, errors that occur during the execution of
+;     scripts will no longer be displayed as a part of the script output, and thus,
+;     will no longer be exposed to remote users.  With some errors, the error message
+;     content may expose information about your script, web server, or database
+;     server that may be exploitable for hacking.  Production sites should have this
+;     directive set to off.
+; - log_errors = On                [Security]
+;     This directive complements the above one.  Any errors that occur during the
+;     execution of your script will be logged (typically, to your server's error log,
+;     but can be configured in several ways).  Along with setting display_errors to off,
+;     this setup gives you the ability to fully understand what may have gone wrong,
+;     without exposing any sensitive information to remote users.
+; - output_buffering = 4096        [Performance]
+;     Set a 4KB output buffer.  Enabling output buffering typically results in less
+;     writes, and sometimes less packets sent on the wire, which can often lead to
+;     better performance.  The gain this directive actually yields greatly depends
+;     on which Web server you're working with, and what kind of scripts you're using.
+; - register_argc_argv = Off       [Performance]
+;     Disables registration of the somewhat redundant $argv and $argc global
+;     variables.
+; - magic_quotes_gpc = Off         [Performance]
+;     Input data is no longer escaped with slashes so that it can be sent into
+;     SQL databases without further manipulation.  Instead, you should use the
+;     function addslashes() on each input element you wish to send to a database.
+; - variables_order = "GPCS"       [Performance]
+;     The environment variables are not hashed into the $HTTP_ENV_VARS[].  To access
+;     environment variables, you can use getenv() instead.
+; - error_reporting = E_ALL        [Code Cleanliness, Security(?)]
+;     By default, PHP surpresses errors of type E_NOTICE.  These error messages
+;     are emitted for non-critical errors, but that could be a symptom of a bigger
+;     problem.  Most notably, this will cause error messages about the use
+;     of uninitialized variables to be displayed.
+; - allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off     [Code cleanliness]
+;     It's not possible to decide to force a variable to be passed by reference
+;     when calling a function.  The PHP 4 style to do this is by making the
+;     function require the relevant argument by reference.
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Language Options ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Enable the PHP scripting language engine under Apache.
+engine = On
+
+; Allow the <? tag.  Otherwise, only <?php and <script> tags are recognized.  
+; NOTE: Using short tags should be avoided when developing applications or
+; libraries that are meant for redistribution, or deployment on PHP
+; servers which are not under your control, because short tags may not
+; be supported on the target server. For portable, redistributable code,
+; be sure not to use short tags.
+short_open_tag = On
+
+; Allow ASP-style <% %> tags.
+asp_tags = Off
+
+; The number of significant digits displayed in floating point numbers.
+precision    =  14
+
+; Enforce year 2000 compliance (will cause problems with non-compliant browsers)
+y2k_compliance = On
+
+; Output buffering allows you to send header lines (including cookies) even
+; after you send body content, at the price of slowing PHP's output layer a
+; bit.  You can enable output buffering during runtime by calling the output
+; buffering functions.  You can also enable output buffering for all files by
+; setting this directive to On.  If you wish to limit the size of the buffer
+; to a certain size - you can use a maximum number of bytes instead of 'On', as
+; a value for this directive (e.g., output_buffering=4096).
+output_buffering = 4096
+
+; You can redirect all of the output of your scripts to a function.  For
+; example, if you set output_handler to "mb_output_handler", character
+; encoding will be transparently converted to the specified encoding.
+; Setting any output handler automatically turns on output buffering.
+; Note: People who wrote portable scripts should not depend on this ini
+;       directive. Instead, explicitly set the output handler using ob_start().
+;       Using this ini directive may cause problems unless you know what script 
+;       is doing.
+; Note: You cannot use both "mb_output_handler" with "ob_iconv_handler"
+;       and you cannot use both "ob_gzhandler" and "zlib.output_compression". 
+;output_handler =
+
+; Transparent output compression using the zlib library
+; Valid values for this option are 'off', 'on', or a specific buffer size
+; to be used for compression (default is 4KB)
+; Note: Resulting chunk size may vary due to nature of compression. PHP 
+;       outputs chunks that are few handreds bytes each as a result of compression. 
+;       If you want larger chunk size for better performence, enable output_buffering 
+;       also. 
+; Note: output_handler must be empty if this is set 'On' !!!!
+;       Instead you must use zlib.output_handler.
+zlib.output_compression = Off
+
+; You cannot specify additional output handlers if zlib.output_compression
+; is activated here. This setting does the same as output_handler but in
+; a different order.
+;zlib.output_handler =
+
+; Implicit flush tells PHP to tell the output layer to flush itself
+; automatically after every output block.  This is equivalent to calling the
+; PHP function flush() after each and every call to print() or echo() and each
+; and every HTML block.  Turning this option on has serious performance
+; implications and is generally recommended for debugging purposes only.
+implicit_flush = Off
+
+; The unserialize callback function will be called (with the undefined class'
+; name as parameter), if the unserializer finds an undefined class
+; which should be instanciated.
+; A warning appears if the specified function is not defined, or if the
+; function doesn't include/implement the missing class.
+; So only set this entry, if you really want to implement such a 
+; callback-function.
+unserialize_callback_func=
+
+; When floats & doubles are serialized store serialize_precision significant
+; digits after the floating point. The default value ensures that when floats
+; are decoded with unserialize, the data will remain the same.
+serialize_precision = 100
+
+; Whether to enable the ability to force arguments to be passed by reference
+; at function call time.  This method is deprecated and is likely to be
+; unsupported in future versions of PHP/Zend.  The encouraged method of
+; specifying which arguments should be passed by reference is in the function
+; declaration.  You're encouraged to try and turn this option Off and make
+; sure your scripts work properly with it in order to ensure they will work
+; with future versions of the language (you will receive a warning each time
+; you use this feature, and the argument will be passed by value instead of by
+; reference).
+allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off
+
+;
+; Safe Mode
+;
+safe_mode = Off
+
+; By default, Safe Mode does a UID compare check when
+; opening files. If you want to relax this to a GID compare,
+; then turn on safe_mode_gid.
+safe_mode_gid = Off
+
+; When safe_mode is on, UID/GID checks are bypassed when
+; including files from this directory and its subdirectories.
+; (directory must also be in include_path or full path must
+; be used when including)
+safe_mode_include_dir =								
+
+; When safe_mode is on, only executables located in the safe_mode_exec_dir
+; will be allowed to be executed via the exec family of functions.
+safe_mode_exec_dir =
+
+; Setting certain environment variables may be a potential security breach.
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of prefixes.  In Safe Mode,
+; the user may only alter environment variables whose names begin with the
+; prefixes supplied here.  By default, users will only be able to set
+; environment variables that begin with PHP_ (e.g. PHP_FOO=BAR).
+;
+; Note:  If this directive is empty, PHP will let the user modify ANY
+; environment variable!
+safe_mode_allowed_env_vars = PHP_
+
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of environment variables that
+; the end user won't be able to change using putenv().  These variables will be
+; protected even if safe_mode_allowed_env_vars is set to allow to change them.
+safe_mode_protected_env_vars = LD_LIBRARY_PATH
+
+; open_basedir, if set, limits all file operations to the defined directory
+; and below.  This directive makes most sense if used in a per-directory
+; or per-virtualhost web server configuration file. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+;open_basedir =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain functions for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of function names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_functions =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain classes for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of class names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_classes =
+
+; Colors for Syntax Highlighting mode.  Anything that's acceptable in
+; <font color="??????"> would work.
+;highlight.string  = #DD0000
+;highlight.comment = #FF9900
+;highlight.keyword = #007700
+;highlight.bg      = #FFFFFF
+;highlight.default = #0000BB
+;highlight.html    = #000000
+
+
+;
+; Misc
+;
+; Decides whether PHP may expose the fact that it is installed on the server
+; (e.g. by adding its signature to the Web server header).  It is no security
+; threat in any way, but it makes it possible to determine whether you use PHP
+; on your server or not.
+expose_php = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Resource Limits ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+max_execution_time = 30     ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds
+max_input_time = 60	; Maximum amount of time each script may spend parsing request data
+memory_limit = 8M      ; Maximum amount of memory a script may consume (8MB)
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Error handling and logging ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; error_reporting is a bit-field.  Or each number up to get desired error
+; reporting level
+; E_ALL             - All errors and warnings
+; E_ERROR           - fatal run-time errors
+; E_WARNING         - run-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_PARSE           - compile-time parse errors
+; E_NOTICE          - run-time notices (these are warnings which often result
+;                     from a bug in your code, but it's possible that it was
+;                     intentional (e.g., using an uninitialized variable and
+;                     relying on the fact it's automatically initialized to an
+;                     empty string)
+; E_CORE_ERROR      - fatal errors that occur during PHP's initial startup
+; E_CORE_WARNING    - warnings (non-fatal errors) that occur during PHP's
+;                     initial startup
+; E_COMPILE_ERROR   - fatal compile-time errors
+; E_COMPILE_WARNING - compile-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_USER_ERROR      - user-generated error message
+; E_USER_WARNING    - user-generated warning message
+; E_USER_NOTICE     - user-generated notice message
+;
+; Examples:
+;
+;   - Show all errors, except for notices
+;
+;error_reporting = E_ALL & ~E_NOTICE
+;
+;   - Show only errors
+;
+;error_reporting = E_COMPILE_ERROR|E_ERROR|E_CORE_ERROR
+;
+;   - Show all errors
+;
+error_reporting  =  E_ALL
+
+; Print out errors (as a part of the output).  For production web sites,
+; you're strongly encouraged to turn this feature off, and use error logging
+; instead (see below).  Keeping display_errors enabled on a production web site
+; may reveal security information to end users, such as file paths on your Web
+; server, your database schema or other information.
+display_errors = Off
+
+; Even when display_errors is on, errors that occur during PHP's startup
+; sequence are not displayed.  It's strongly recommended to keep
+; display_startup_errors off, except for when debugging.
+display_startup_errors = Off
+
+; Log errors into a log file (server-specific log, stderr, or error_log (below))
+; As stated above, you're strongly advised to use error logging in place of
+; error displaying on production web sites.
+log_errors = On
+
+; Set maximum length of log_errors. In error_log information about the source is
+; added. The default is 1024 and 0 allows to not apply any maximum length at all.
+log_errors_max_len = 1024
+
+; Do not log repeated messages. Repeated errors must occur in same file on same
+; line until ignore_repeated_source is set true.
+ignore_repeated_errors = Off
+
+; Ignore source of message when ignoring repeated messages. When this setting 
+; is On you will not log errors with repeated messages from different files or
+; sourcelines.
+ignore_repeated_source = Off
+
+; If this parameter is set to Off, then memory leaks will not be shown (on
+; stdout or in the log). This has only effect in a debug compile, and if 
+; error reporting includes E_WARNING in the allowed list
+report_memleaks = On
+
+; Store the last error/warning message in $php_errormsg (boolean).
+track_errors = Off
+
+; Disable the inclusion of HTML tags in error messages.
+;html_errors = Off
+
+; If html_errors is set On PHP produces clickable error messages that direct 
+; to a page describing the error or function causing the error in detail.
+; You can download a copy of the PHP manual from http://www.php.net/docs.php 
+; and change docref_root to the base URL of your local copy including the
+; leading '/'. You must also specify the file extension being used including 
+; the dot.
+;docref_root = "/phpmanual/"
+;docref_ext = .html
+  
+; String to output before an error message.
+;error_prepend_string = "<font color=ff0000>"
+
+; String to output after an error message.
+;error_append_string = "</font>"
+
+; Log errors to specified file.
+;error_log = filename
+
+; Log errors to syslog (Event Log on NT, not valid in Windows 95).
+;error_log = syslog
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Data Handling ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; Note - track_vars is ALWAYS enabled as of PHP 4.0.3
+
+; The separator used in PHP generated URLs to separate arguments.
+; Default is "&". 
+;arg_separator.output = "&amp;"
+
+; List of separator(s) used by PHP to parse input URLs into variables.
+; Default is "&". 
+; NOTE: Every character in this directive is considered as separator!
+;arg_separator.input = ";&"
+
+; This directive describes the order in which PHP registers GET, POST, Cookie,
+; Environment and Built-in variables (G, P, C, E & S respectively, often
+; referred to as EGPCS or GPC).  Registration is done from left to right, newer
+; values override older values.
+variables_order = "GPCS"
+
+; Whether or not to register the EGPCS variables as global variables.  You may
+; want to turn this off if you don't want to clutter your scripts' global scope
+; with user data.  This makes most sense when coupled with track_vars - in which
+; case you can access all of the GPC variables through the $HTTP_*_VARS[],
+; variables.
+;
+; You should do your best to write your scripts so that they do not require
+; register_globals to be on;  Using form variables as globals can easily lead
+; to possible security problems, if the code is not very well thought of.
+register_globals = Off
+
+; This directive tells PHP whether to declare the argv&argc variables (that
+; would contain the GET information).  If you don't use these variables, you
+; should turn it off for increased performance.
+register_argc_argv = Off
+
+; Maximum size of POST data that PHP will accept.
+post_max_size = 8M
+
+; This directive is deprecated.  Use variables_order instead.
+gpc_order = "GPC"
+
+; Magic quotes
+;
+
+; Magic quotes for incoming GET/POST/Cookie data.
+magic_quotes_gpc = Off
+
+; Magic quotes for runtime-generated data, e.g. data from SQL, from exec(), etc.
+magic_quotes_runtime = Off    
+
+; Use Sybase-style magic quotes (escape ' with '' instead of \').
+magic_quotes_sybase = Off
+
+; Automatically add files before or after any PHP document.
+auto_prepend_file =
+auto_append_file =
+
+; As of 4.0b4, PHP always outputs a character encoding by default in
+; the Content-type: header.  To disable sending of the charset, simply
+; set it to be empty.
+;
+; PHP's built-in default is text/html
+default_mimetype = "text/html"
+;default_charset = "iso-8859-1"
+
+; Always populate the $HTTP_RAW_POST_DATA variable.                               
+;always_populate_raw_post_data = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Paths and Directories ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; UNIX: "/path1:/path2"  
+;include_path = ".:/php/includes"
+;
+; Windows: "\path1;\path2"
+;include_path = ".;c:\php\includes"
+
+; The root of the PHP pages, used only if nonempty.
+; if PHP was not compiled with FORCE_REDIRECT, you SHOULD set doc_root
+; if you are running php as a CGI under any web server (other than IIS)
+; see documentation for security issues.  The alternate is to use the
+; cgi.force_redirect configuration below
+doc_root =
+
+; The directory under which PHP opens the script using /~usernamem used only
+; if nonempty.
+user_dir =
+
+; Directory in which the loadable extensions (modules) reside.
+; extension_dir = "./"
+extension_dir = "/usr/lib/php/extensions/"
+
+; Whether or not to enable the dl() function.  The dl() function does NOT work
+; properly in multithreaded servers, such as IIS or Zeus, and is automatically
+; disabled on them.
+enable_dl = On
+
+; cgi.force_redirect is necessary to provide security running PHP as a CGI under
+; most web servers.  Left undefined, PHP turns this on by default.  You can
+; turn it off here AT YOUR OWN RISK
+; **You CAN safely turn this off for IIS, in fact, you MUST.**
+; cgi.force_redirect = 1
+
+; if cgi.nph is enabled it will force cgi to always sent Status: 200 with
+; every request.
+; cgi.nph = 1
+
+; if cgi.force_redirect is turned on, and you are not running under Apache or Netscape 
+; (iPlanet) web servers, you MAY need to set an environment variable name that PHP
+; will look for to know it is OK to continue execution.  Setting this variable MAY
+; cause security issues, KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING FIRST.
+; cgi.redirect_status_env = ;
+
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo provides *real* PATH_INFO/PATH_TRANSLATED support for CGI.  PHP's
+; previous behaviour was to set PATH_TRANSLATED to SCRIPT_FILENAME, and to not grok
+; what PATH_INFO is.  For more information on PATH_INFO, see the cgi specs.  Setting
+; this to 1 will cause PHP CGI to fix it's paths to conform to the spec.  A setting
+; of zero causes PHP to behave as before.  Default is zero.  You should fix your scripts
+; to use SCRIPT_FILENAME rather than PATH_TRANSLATED.
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo=1
+
+; FastCGI under IIS (on WINNT based OS) supports the ability to impersonate
+; security tokens of the calling client.  This allows IIS to define the
+; security context that the request runs under.  mod_fastcgi under Apache
+; does not currently support this feature (03/17/2002)
+; Set to 1 if running under IIS.  Default is zero.
+; fastcgi.impersonate = 1;
+
+; Disable logging through FastCGI connection
+; fastcgi.log = 0
+
+; cgi.rfc2616_headers configuration option tells PHP what type of headers to
+; use when sending HTTP response code. If it's set 0 PHP sends Status: header that
+; is supported by Apache. When this option is set to 1 PHP will send
+; RFC2616 compliant header.
+; Default is zero.
+;cgi.rfc2616_headers = 0 
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; File Uploads ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow HTTP file uploads.
+file_uploads = On
+
+; Temporary directory for HTTP uploaded files (will use system default if not
+; specified).
+;upload_tmp_dir =
+
+; Maximum allowed size for uploaded files.
+upload_max_filesize = 10M
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Fopen wrappers ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow the treatment of URLs (like http:// or ftp://) as files.
+allow_url_fopen = On
+
+; Define the anonymous ftp password (your email address)
+;from="john@doe.com"
+
+; Define the user agent for php to send
+;user_agent="PHP"
+
+; Default timeout for socket based streams (seconds)
+default_socket_timeout = 60
+
+; If your scripts have to deal with files from Macintosh systems,
+; or you are running on a Mac and need to deal with files from
+; unix or win32 systems, setting this flag will cause PHP to
+; automatically detect the EOL character in those files so that
+; fgets() and file() will work regardless of the source of the file.
+; auto_detect_line_endings = Off
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Dynamic Extensions ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; If you wish to have an extension loaded automatically, use the following
+; syntax:
+;
+;   extension=modulename.extension
+;
+; For example, on Windows:
+;
+;   extension=msql.dll
+;
+; ... or under UNIX:
+;
+;   extension=msql.so
+;
+; Note that it should be the name of the module only; no directory information 
+; needs to go here.  Specify the location of the extension with the
+; extension_dir directive above.
+;
+; Load the MySQL module by default.  Comment this out if you don't use MySQL.
+extension=mysql.so
+
+; Load the gettext extension by default.  Comment this out if you don't have the
+; gettext shared library installed.
+extension=gettext.so
+
+;Windows Extensions
+;Note that MySQL and ODBC support is now built in, so no dll is needed for it.
+;
+;extension=php_mbstring.dll
+;extension=php_bz2.dll
+;extension=php_cpdf.dll
+;extension=php_crack.dll
+;extension=php_curl.dll
+;extension=php_db.dll
+;extension=php_dba.dll
+;extension=php_dbase.dll
+;extension=php_dbx.dll
+;extension=php_domxml.dll
+;extension=php_exif.dll
+;extension=php_fdf.dll
+;extension=php_filepro.dll
+;extension=php_gd2.dll
+;extension=php_gettext.dll
+;extension=php_hyperwave.dll
+;extension=php_iconv.dll
+;extension=php_ifx.dll
+;extension=php_iisfunc.dll
+;extension=php_imap.dll
+;extension=php_interbase.dll
+;extension=php_java.dll
+;extension=php_ldap.dll
+;extension=php_mcrypt.dll
+;extension=php_mhash.dll
+;extension=php_mime_magic.dll
+;extension=php_ming.dll
+;extension=php_mssql.dll
+;extension=php_msql.dll
+;extension=php_oci8.dll
+;extension=php_openssl.dll
+;extension=php_oracle.dll
+;extension=php_pdf.dll
+;extension=php_pgsql.dll
+;extension=php_printer.dll
+;extension=php_shmop.dll
+;extension=php_snmp.dll
+;extension=php_sockets.dll
+;extension=php_sybase_ct.dll
+;extension=php_w32api.dll
+;extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
+;extension=php_xslt.dll
+;extension=php_yaz.dll
+;extension=php_zip.dll
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Module Settings ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+[Syslog]
+; Whether or not to define the various syslog variables (e.g. $LOG_PID,
+; $LOG_CRON, etc.).  Turning it off is a good idea performance-wise.  In
+; runtime, you can define these variables by calling define_syslog_variables().
+define_syslog_variables  = Off
+
+[mail function]
+; For Win32 only.
+SMTP = localhost
+smtp_port = 25
+
+; For Win32 only.
+;sendmail_from = me@example.com
+
+; For Unix only.  You may supply arguments as well (default: "sendmail -t -i").
+;sendmail_path =
+
+[Java]
+;java.class.path = .\php_java.jar
+;java.home = c:\jdk
+;java.library = c:\jdk\jre\bin\hotspot\jvm.dll 
+;java.library.path = .\
+
+[SQL]
+sql.safe_mode = Off
+
+[ODBC]
+;odbc.default_db    =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_user  =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_pw    =  Not yet implemented
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+odbc.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Check that a connection is still valid before reuse.
+odbc.check_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_links = -1  
+
+; Handling of LONG fields.  Returns number of bytes to variables.  0 means
+; passthru.
+odbc.defaultlrl = 4096  
+
+; Handling of binary data.  0 means passthru, 1 return as is, 2 convert to char.
+; See the documentation on odbc_binmode and odbc_longreadlen for an explanation
+; of uodbc.defaultlrl and uodbc.defaultbinmode
+odbc.defaultbinmode = 1  
+
+[MySQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mysql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_links = -1
+
+; Default port number for mysql_connect().  If unset, mysql_connect() will use
+; the $MYSQL_TCP_PORT or the mysql-tcp entry in /etc/services or the
+; compile-time value defined MYSQL_PORT (in that order).  Win32 will only look
+; at MYSQL_PORT.
+mysql.default_port =
+
+; Default socket name for local MySQL connects.  If empty, uses the built-in
+; MySQL defaults.
+mysql.default_socket =
+
+; Default host for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_host =
+
+; Default user for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_user =
+
+; Default password for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+; Note that this is generally a *bad* idea to store passwords in this file.
+; *Any* user with PHP access can run 'echo get_cfg_var("mysql.default_password")
+; and reveal this password!  And of course, any users with read access to this
+; file will be able to reveal the password as well.
+mysql.default_password =
+
+; Maximum time (in seconds) for connect timeout. -1 means no limit
+mysql.connect_timeout = 60
+
+; Trace mode. When trace_mode is active (=On), warnings for table/index scans and
+; SQL-Errors will be displayed.
+mysql.trace_mode = Off
+
+[mSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+msql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_links = -1
+
+[PostgresSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+pgsql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Detect broken persistent links always with pg_pconnect(). 
+; Auto reset feature requires a little overheads.
+pgsql.auto_reset_persistent = Off
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_links = -1
+
+; Ignore PostgreSQL backends Notice message or not.
+; Notice message logging require a little overheads.
+pgsql.ignore_notice = 0
+
+; Log PostgreSQL backends Noitce message or not.
+; Unless pgsql.ignore_notice=0, module cannot log notice message.
+pgsql.log_notice = 0
+
+[Sybase]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybase.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_links = -1
+
+;sybase.interface_file = "/usr/sybase/interfaces"
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+sybase.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+sybase.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+; If on, this will cause PHP to automatically assign types to results according
+; to their Sybase type, instead of treating them all as strings.  This
+; compatibility mode will probably not stay around forever, so try applying
+; whatever necessary changes to your code, and turn it off.
+sybase.compatability_mode = Off
+
+[Sybase-CT]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybct.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum server message severity to display.
+sybct.min_server_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum client message severity to display.
+sybct.min_client_severity = 10
+
+[dbx]
+; returned column names can be converted for compatibility reasons
+; possible values for dbx.colnames_case are
+; "unchanged" (default, if not set)
+; "lowercase"
+; "uppercase"
+; the recommended default is either upper- or lowercase, but
+; unchanged is currently set for backwards compatibility
+dbx.colnames_case = "lowercase"
+
+[bcmath]
+; Number of decimal digits for all bcmath functions.
+bcmath.scale = 0
+
+[browscap]
+;browscap = extra/browscap.ini
+
+[Informix]
+; Default host for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_host =
+
+; Default user for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_user =
+
+; Default password for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_password =
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ifx.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_links = -1
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a text blob instead of its id.
+ifx.textasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a byte blob instead of its id.
+ifx.byteasvarchar = 0
+
+; Trailing blanks are stripped from fixed-length char columns.  May help the
+; life of Informix SE users.
+ifx.charasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, the contents of text and byte blobs are dumped to a file instead of
+; keeping them in memory.
+ifx.blobinfile = 0
+
+; NULL's are returned as empty strings, unless this is set to 1.  In that case,
+; NULL's are returned as string 'NULL'.
+ifx.nullformat = 0
+
+[Session]
+; Handler used to store/retrieve data.
+session.save_handler = files
+
+; Argument passed to save_handler.  In the case of files, this is the path
+; where data files are stored. Note: Windows users have to change this 
+; variable in order to use PHP's session functions.
+;session.save_path = /tmp
+
+; Whether to use cookies.
+session.use_cookies = 1
+
+; This option enables administrators to make their users invulnerable to 
+; attacks which involve passing session ids in URLs; defaults to 0.
+; session.use_only_cookies = 1
+
+; Name of the session (used as cookie name).
+session.name = PHPSESSID
+
+; Initialize session on request startup.
+session.auto_start = 0
+
+; Lifetime in seconds of cookie or, if 0, until browser is restarted.
+session.cookie_lifetime = 0
+
+; The path for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_path = /
+
+; The domain for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_domain =
+
+; Handler used to serialize data.  php is the standard serializer of PHP.
+session.serialize_handler = php
+
+; Define the probability that the 'garbage collection' process is started
+; on every session initialization.
+; The probability is calculated by using gc_probability/gc_divisor,
+; e.g. 1/100 means there is a 1% chance that the GC process starts
+; on each request.
+
+session.gc_probability = 1
+session.gc_divisor     = 1000
+
+; After this number of seconds, stored data will be seen as 'garbage' and
+; cleaned up by the garbage collection process.
+session.gc_maxlifetime = 1440
+
+; PHP 4.2 and less have an undocumented feature/bug that allows you to
+; to initialize a session variable in the global scope, albeit register_globals
+; is disabled.  PHP 4.3 and later will warn you, if this feature is used.
+; You can disable the feature and the warning separately. At this time,
+; the warning is only displayed, if bug_compat_42 is enabled.
+
+session.bug_compat_42 = 0
+session.bug_compat_warn = 1
+
+; Check HTTP Referer to invalidate externally stored URLs containing ids.
+; HTTP_REFERER has to contain this substring for the session to be
+; considered as valid.
+session.referer_check =
+
+; How many bytes to read from the file.
+session.entropy_length = 0
+
+; Specified here to create the session id.
+session.entropy_file =
+
+;session.entropy_length = 16
+
+;session.entropy_file = /dev/urandom
+
+; Set to {nocache,private,public,} to determine HTTP caching aspects.
+; or leave this empty to avoid sending anti-caching headers.
+session.cache_limiter = nocache
+
+; Document expires after n minutes.
+session.cache_expire = 180
+
+; trans sid support is disabled by default.
+; Use of trans sid may risk your users security.
+; Use this option with caution.
+; - User may send URL contains active session ID
+;   to other person via. email/irc/etc.
+; - URL that contains active session ID may be stored
+;   in publically accessible computer. 
+; - User may access your site with the same session ID
+;   always using URL stored in browser's history or bookmarks.
+session.use_trans_sid = 0
+
+; The URL rewriter will look for URLs in a defined set of HTML tags.
+; form/fieldset are special; if you include them here, the rewriter will
+; add a hidden <input> field with the info which is otherwise appended
+; to URLs.  If you want XHTML conformity, remove the form entry.
+; Note that all valid entries require a "=", even if no value follows.
+url_rewriter.tags = "a=href,area=href,frame=src,input=src,form=fakeentry"
+
+[MSSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mssql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+mssql.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+mssql.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+mssql.compatability_mode = Off
+
+; Connect timeout
+;mssql.connect_timeout = 5
+
+; Query timeout
+;mssql.timeout = 60
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textlimit = 4096
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textsize = 4096
+
+; Limits the number of records in each batch.  0 = all records in one batch.
+;mssql.batchsize = 0
+
+; Specify how datetime and datetim4 columns are returned
+; On => Returns data converted to SQL server settings
+; Off => Returns values as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss
+;mssql.datetimeconvert = On
+
+; Use NT authentication when connecting to the server
+mssql.secure_connection = Off
+
+; Specify max number of processes. Default = 25
+;mssql.max_procs = 25
+
+[Assertion]
+; Assert(expr); active by default.
+;assert.active = On
+
+; Issue a PHP warning for each failed assertion.
+;assert.warning = On
+
+; Don't bail out by default.
+;assert.bail = Off
+
+; User-function to be called if an assertion fails.
+;assert.callback = 0
+
+; Eval the expression with current error_reporting().  Set to true if you want
+; error_reporting(0) around the eval().
+;assert.quiet_eval = 0
+
+[Ingres II]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ingres.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links, including persistents.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_links = -1
+
+; Default database (format: [node_id::]dbname[/srv_class]).
+ingres.default_database =
+
+; Default user.
+ingres.default_user =
+
+; Default password.
+ingres.default_password =
+
+[Verisign Payflow Pro]
+; Default Payflow Pro server.
+pfpro.defaulthost = "test-payflow.verisign.com"
+
+; Default port to connect to.
+pfpro.defaultport = 443
+
+; Default timeout in seconds.
+pfpro.defaulttimeout = 30
+
+; Default proxy IP address (if required).
+;pfpro.proxyaddress =
+
+; Default proxy port.
+;pfpro.proxyport =
+
+; Default proxy logon.
+;pfpro.proxylogon =
+
+; Default proxy password.
+;pfpro.proxypassword =
+
+[com]
+; path to a file containing GUIDs, IIDs or filenames of files with TypeLibs
+;com.typelib_file = 
+; allow Distributed-COM calls
+;com.allow_dcom = true
+; autoregister constants of a components typlib on com_load()
+;com.autoregister_typelib = true
+; register constants casesensitive
+;com.autoregister_casesensitive = false
+; show warnings on duplicate constat registrations
+;com.autoregister_verbose = true
+
+[Printer]
+;printer.default_printer = ""
+
+[mbstring]
+; language for internal character representation.
+;mbstring.language = Japanese
+
+; internal/script encoding.
+; Some encoding cannot work as internal encoding.
+; (e.g. SJIS, BIG5, ISO-2022-*)
+;mbstring.internal_encoding = EUC-JP
+
+; http input encoding.
+;mbstring.http_input = auto
+
+; http output encoding. mb_output_handler must be
+; registered as output buffer to function
+;mbstring.http_output = SJIS
+
+; enable automatic encoding translation accoding to 
+; mbstring.internal_encoding setting. Input chars are
+; converted to internal encoding by setting this to On.
+; Note: Do _not_ use automatic encoding translation for
+;       portable libs/applications.
+;mbstring.encoding_translation = Off
+
+; automatic encoding detection order.
+; auto means 
+;mbstring.detect_order = auto
+
+; substitute_character used when character cannot be converted
+; one from another
+;mbstring.substitute_character = none;
+
+; overload(replace) single byte functions by mbstring functions.
+; mail(), ereg(), etc are overloaded by mb_send_mail(), mb_ereg(),
+; etc. Possible values are 0,1,2,4 or combination of them.
+; For example, 7 for overload everything.
+; 0: No overload
+; 1: Overload mail() function
+; 2: Overload str*() functions
+; 4: Overload ereg*() functions
+;mbstring.func_overload = 0
+
+[FrontBase]
+;fbsql.allow_persistent = On
+;fbsql.autocommit = On
+;fbsql.default_database = 
+;fbsql.default_database_password =
+;fbsql.default_host =
+;fbsql.default_password =
+;fbsql.default_user = "_SYSTEM"
+;fbsql.generate_warnings = Off
+;fbsql.max_connections = 128
+;fbsql.max_links = 128
+;fbsql.max_persistent = -1
+;fbsql.max_results = 128
+;fbsql.batchSize = 1000
+
+[Crack]
+; Modify the setting below to match the directory location of the cracklib
+; dictionary files.  Include the base filename, but not the file extension.
+; crack.default_dictionary = "c:\php\lib\cracklib_dict"
+
+[exif]
+; Exif UNICODE user comments are handled as UCS-2BE/UCS-2LE and JIS as JIS. 
+; With mbstring support this will automatically be converted into the encoding
+; given by corresponding encode setting. When empty mbstring.internal_encoding 
+; is used. For the decode settings you can distinguish between motorola and 
+; intel byte order. A decode setting cannot be empty.
+;exif.encode_unicode = ISO-8859-15
+;exif.decode_unicode_motorola = UCS-2BE
+;exif.decode_unicode_intel    = UCS-2LE
+;exif.encode_jis = 
+;exif.decode_jis_motorola = JIS
+;exif.decode_jis_intel    = JIS
+
+; Local Variables:
+; tab-width: 4
+; End:
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e33147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/hosts
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+# hosts		This file describes a number of hostname-to-address
+#		mappings for the TCP/IP subsystem.  It is mostly
+#		used at boot time, when no name servers are running.
+#		On small systems, this file can be used instead of a
+#		"named" name server.  Just add the names, addresses
+#		and any aliases to this file...
+#
+# By the way, Arnt Gulbrandsen <agulbra@nvg.unit.no> says that 127.0.0.1
+# should NEVER be named with the name of the machine.  It causes problems
+# for some (stupid) programs, irc and reputedly talk. :^)
+#
+
+# For loopbacking.
+127.0.0.1	localhost
+# This next entry is technically wrong, but good enough to get TCP/IP apps
+# to quit complaining that they can't verify the hostname on a loopback-only
+# Linux box.
+127.0.0.1	darkstar.example.net darkstar
+
+# End of hosts.
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f31fbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+/var/log/apache/access_log /var/log/apache/error_log {
+    monthly
+    nomail
+    compress
+    create 0664 root root
+    rotate 12
+    postrotate
+      /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd restart > /dev/null
+    endscript
+}
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..563594a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/profile
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# /etc/profile: This file contains system-wide defaults used by
+# all Bourne (and related) shells.
+
+# Set the values for some environment variables:
+export MINICOM="-c on"
+export MANPATH=/usr/local/man:/usr/man:/usr/X11R6/man
+export HOSTNAME="`cat /etc/HOSTNAME`"
+export LESSOPEN="|lesspipe.sh %s"
+export LESS="-M"
+
+# If the user doesn't have a .inputrc, use the one in /etc.
+if [ ! -r "$HOME/.inputrc" ]; then
+  export INPUTRC=/etc/inputrc
+fi
+
+# Set the default system $PATH:
+PATH="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin:/usr/games"
+
+# For root users, ensure that /usr/local/sbin, /usr/sbin, and /sbin are in
+# the $PATH.  Some means of connection don't add these by default (sshd comes
+# to mind).
+if [ "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+  echo $PATH | grep /usr/local/sbin 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+  if [ ! $? = 0 ]; then
+    PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:$PATH
+  fi
+fi
+
+# I had problems using 'eval tset' instead of 'TERM=', but you might want to 
+# try it anyway. I think with the right /etc/termcap it would work great.
+# eval `tset -sQ "$TERM"`
+if [ "$TERM" = "" -o "$TERM" = "unknown" ]; then
+ TERM=linux
+fi
+
+# Set ksh93 visual editing mode:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+  VISUAL=emacs
+#  VISUAL=gmacs
+#  VISUAL=vi
+fi
+
+# Set a default shell prompt:
+#PS1='`hostname`:`pwd`# '
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/pdksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! $ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! ${PWD/#$HOME/~}$ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ PS1='%n@%m:%~%# '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ PS1='$ '
+else
+ PS1='\u@\h:\w\$ '
+fi
+PS2='> '
+export PATH DISPLAY LESS TERM PS1 PS2
+
+# Default umask.  A umask of 022 prevents new files from being created group
+# and world writable.
+umask 022
+
+# Set up the LS_COLORS and LS_OPTIONS environment variables for color ls:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -z`
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -s`
+else
+ eval `dircolors -b`
+fi
+
+# Append any additional sh scripts found in /etc/profile.d/:
+for profile_script in /etc/profile.d/*.sh ; do
+  if [ -x $profile_script ]; then
+    . $profile_script
+  fi
+done
+unset profile_script
+
+# For non-root users, add the current directory to the search path:
+if [ ! "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+ PATH="$PATH:."
+fi
+
+# firewall:
+export FTP_PASSIVE=1
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0 b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4 b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b972052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links:  /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes:  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6 b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..00a1501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.K 		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		1, which is the administrative state. It kills all
+#		daemons and then puts the system into single user mode.
+#		Note that the file systems are kept mounted.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.K	3.1415 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off quota:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaoff ]; then
+    echo "Turning off filesystem quotas."
+    /sbin/quotaoff -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down PCMCIA devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia stop
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  sleep 5
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGHUP signal."
+killall5 -1
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to hang up"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGTERM signal."
+killall5 -15
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to terminate"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGKILL signal."
+killall5 -9
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to exit"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+
+# Now go to the single user level
+echo "Going to single user mode..."
+telinit -t 1 1
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0cb3343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links: /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes: /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..05c75b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.S:  System initialization script.
+#
+# Mostly written by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+PATH=/sbin:/usr/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# Mount /proc right away:
+/sbin/mount -v proc /proc -n -t proc
+
+# If 'nohotplug' was given at boot, or rc.hotplug has been turned off
+# (is not executable), then shut off hotplugging in the kernel now.
+# Turning off hotplug is *not* recommended, and will break some things.
+if [ -w /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug ]; then
+  if grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  elif [ ! -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug ]; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start devfsd if necessary.  On newer kernels, udev should be used instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd start
+fi
+
+# Mount sysfs next, if the kernel supports it:
+if [ -d /sys ]; then
+  if cat /proc/filesystems | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    if ! cat /proc/mounts | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+      /sbin/mount -v sysfs /sys -n -t sysfs
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize udev to manage /dev entries for 2.6.x kernels:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.udev ]; then
+  if ! grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    /etc/rc.d/rc.udev
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Enable swapping:
+/sbin/swapon -a
+
+# Test to see if the root partition is read-only, like it ought to be.
+READWRITE=no
+if touch /fsrwtestfile 2>/dev/null; then
+  rm -f /fsrwtestfile
+  READWRITE=yes
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-only filesystem"
+fi
+
+# See if a forced filesystem check was requested at shutdown:
+if [ -r /etc/forcefsck ]; then
+  FORCEFSCK="-f"
+fi
+
+# Check the root filesystem:
+if [ ! $READWRITE = yes ]; then
+  RETVAL=0
+  if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+    echo "Checking root filesystem:"
+    /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -a /
+    RETVAL=$?
+  fi
+  # An error code of 2 or higher will require a reboot.
+  if [ $RETVAL -ge 2 ]; then
+    # An error code equal to or greater than 4 means that some errors
+    # could not be corrected.  This requires manual attention, so we
+    # offer a chance to try to fix the problem in single-user mode:
+    if [ $RETVAL -ge 4 ]; then
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo "*** An error occurred during the root filesystem check. ***"
+      echo "*** You will now be given a chance to log into the      ***"
+      echo "*** system in single-user mode to fix the problem.      ***"
+      echo "***                                                     ***"
+      echo "*** If you are using the ext2 filesystem, running       ***"
+      echo "*** 'e2fsck -v -y <partition>' might help.              ***"
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo
+      echo "Once you exit the single-user shell, the system will reboot."
+      echo
+      PS1="(Repair filesystem) \#"; export PS1
+      sulogin
+    else # With an error code of 2 or 3, reboot the machine automatically:
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo "*** The filesystem was changed. ***"
+      echo "*** The system will now reboot. ***"
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo
+    fi
+    echo "Unmounting file systems."
+    /sbin/umount -a -r
+    /sbin/mount -n -o remount,ro /
+    echo "Rebooting system."
+    sleep 2
+    reboot -f
+  fi
+  # Remount the root filesystem in read-write mode
+  echo "Remounting root device with read-write enabled."
+  /sbin/mount -w -v -n -o remount /
+  if [ $? -gt 0 ] ; then
+    echo
+    echo "Attempt to remount root device as read-write failed!  This is going to"
+    echo "cause serious problems."
+    echo 
+    echo "If you're using the UMSDOS filesystem, you **MUST** mount the root partition"
+    echo "read-write!  You can make sure the root filesystem is getting mounted "
+    echo "read-write with the 'rw' flag to Loadlin:"
+    echo
+    echo "loadlin vmlinuz root=/dev/hda1 rw   (replace /dev/hda1 with your root device)"
+    echo
+    echo "Normal bootdisks can be made to mount a system read-write with the rdev command:"
+    echo
+    echo "rdev -R /dev/fd0 0"
+    echo
+    echo "You can also get into your system by using a boot disk with a command like this"
+    echo "on the LILO prompt line:  (change the root partition name as needed)"
+    echo 
+    echo "LILO: mount root=/dev/hda1 rw"
+    echo
+    echo "Please press ENTER to continue, then reboot and use one of the above methods to"
+    echo -n "get into your machine and start looking for the problem. " 
+    read junk; 
+  fi
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-write filesystem"
+  if cat /etc/fstab | grep ' / ' | grep umsdos 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    ROOTTYPE="umsdos"
+  fi
+  if [ ! "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # no warn for UMSDOS
+    echo
+    echo "*** ERROR: Root partition has already been mounted read-write. Cannot check!"
+    echo
+    echo "For filesystem checking to work properly, your system must initially mount"
+    echo "the root partition as read only. Please modify your kernel with 'rdev' so that"
+    echo "it does this. If you're booting with LILO, add a line:"
+    echo
+    echo "   read-only"
+    echo
+    echo "to the Linux section in your /etc/lilo.conf and type 'lilo' to reinstall it."
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a kernel on a floppy disk, put it in the drive and type:"
+    echo "   rdev -R /dev/fd0 1"
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a bootdisk, or with Loadlin, you can add the 'ro' flag."
+    echo
+    echo "This will fix the problem *AND* eliminate this annoying message. :^)"
+    echo
+    echo -n "Press ENTER to continue. "
+    read junk;
+  fi
+fi # Done checking root filesystem
+
+# Any /etc/mtab that exists here is old, so we delete it to start over:
+/bin/rm -f /etc/mtab*
+# Remounting the / partition will initialize the new /etc/mtab:
+/sbin/mount -w -o remount /
+
+# Fix /etc/mtab to list sys and proc if they were not yet entered in
+# /etc/mtab because / was still mounted read-only:
+if [ -d /proc/sys ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f proc /proc -t proc
+fi
+if [ -d /sys/bus ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f sysfs /sys -t sysfs
+fi
+
+# Set the system time from the hardware clock using hwclock --hctosys.
+if [ -x /sbin/hwclock ]; then
+  if grep "^UTC" /etc/hardwareclock 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (UTC)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --utc --hctosys
+  else
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (localtime)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --localtime --hctosys
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Configure ISA Plug-and-Play devices:
+if [ -r /etc/isapnp.conf ]; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/isapnp ]; then
+    /sbin/isapnp /etc/isapnp.conf
+  fi
+fi
+
+# This loads any kernel modules that are needed.  These might be required to
+# use your ethernet card, sound card, or other optional hardware.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.modules -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.modules
+fi
+
+# Configure runtime kernel parameters:
+if [ -x /sbin/sysctl -a -r /etc/sysctl.conf ]; then
+  /sbin/sysctl -e -p /etc/sysctl.conf
+fi
+
+# Initialize the Logical Volume Manager.
+# This won't start unless we find /etc/lvmtab (LVM1) or 
+# /etc/lvm/backup/ (LVM2).  This is created by /sbin/vgscan, so to
+# use LVM you must run /sbin/vgscan yourself the first time (and
+# create some VGs and LVs).
+if [ -r /etc/lvmtab -o -d /etc/lvm/backup ]; then
+  echo "Initializing LVM (Logical Volume Manager):"
+  # Check for device-mapper support.
+  if ! cat /proc/devices | grep -w device-mapper 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    # If device-mapper exists as a module, try to load it.
+    if [ -r /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko ]; then
+      insmod /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko
+    fi
+  fi
+  # Scan for new volume groups:
+  /sbin/vgscan 2> /dev/null
+  if [ $? = 0 ]; then
+    # This needs a moment to register.
+    sleep 10
+    # Make volume groups available to the kernel.
+    # This should also make logical volumes available.
+    /sbin/vgchange -ay
+    # Enable swapping again in case any LVs are used for swap.  Ignore previous error.  :-)
+    /sbin/swapon -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Check all the non-root filesystems:
+if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+  echo "Checking non-root filesystems:"
+  /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -R -A -a
+fi
+
+# mount non-root file systems in fstab (but not NFS or SMB 
+# because TCP/IP is not yet configured, and not proc because
+# that has already been mounted):
+/sbin/mount -a -v -t nonfs,nosmbfs,noproc
+
+# Clean up some temporary files:
+( cd /var/log/setup/tmp && rm -rf * )
+/bin/rm -f /var/run/utmp /var/run/*pid /etc/nologin /var/run/lpd* \
+  /var/run/ppp* /etc/dhcpc/*.pid /etc/forcefsck /etc/fastboot
+
+# Attempt to umount and remove any leftover /initrd:
+if [ -d /initrd ]; then
+  /sbin/umount /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  rmdir /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0 2> /dev/null
+fi
+
+# Create a fresh utmp file:
+touch /var/run/utmp
+chown root.utmp /var/run/utmp
+chmod 664 /var/run/utmp
+
+if [ "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # we need to update any files added in DOS:
+  echo "Synchronizing UMSDOS directory structure:"
+  echo "  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /"
+  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /
+fi
+
+# Setup the /etc/motd to reflect the current kernel level:
+# THIS WIPES ANY CHANGES YOU MAKE TO /ETC/MOTD WITH EACH BOOT.
+# COMMENT THIS OUT IF YOU WANT TO MAKE A CUSTOM VERSION.
+echo "$(/bin/uname -sr)." > /etc/motd
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Run serial port setup script:
+# (CAREFUL! This can make some systems hang if the rc.serial script isn't
+# set up correctly. If this happens, you may have to edit the file from a
+# boot disk)
+#
+# . /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
+
+# Carry an entropy pool between reboots to improve randomness.
+if [ -f /etc/random-seed ]; then
+  echo "Using /etc/random-seed to initialize /dev/urandom."
+  cat /etc/random-seed > /dev/urandom
+fi
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00b8837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+# Start/stop/restart the Apache web server.
+#
+# To make Apache start automatically at boot, make this
+# file executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+
+case "$1" in
+   'start')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl start ;;
+   'stop')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl stop ;;
+   'restart')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl restart ;;
+   *)
+      echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart" ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..db56589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.inet2	This shell script boots up the entire network system.
+#		Note, that when this script is used to also fire
+#		up any important remote NFS disks (like the /usr
+#		directory), care must be taken to actually
+#		have all the needed binaries online _now_ ...
+#
+#               Uncomment or comment out sections depending on which
+#               services your site requires.
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified for Slackware by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+
+
+# At this point, we are ready to talk to The World...
+
+
+# Mount remote (NFS) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w nfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  # Start the RPC portmapper if we find NFS volumes defined in /etc/fstab,
+  # since it will need to be running in order to mount them.  If portmap
+  # is not running, attempting to mount an NFS partition will cause mount
+  # to hang.  Keep this in mind if you plan to mount unlisted partitions...
+  if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+  else
+    # Warn about a possible NFS problem.  It's also possible to mount NFS partitions
+    # without rpc.portmap by using '-o nolock' (not a good idea in most cases).
+    echo "WARNING:  NFS partitions found in /etc/fstab, but /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is"
+    echo "          not executable.  If you do not run portmap, NFS partitions will"
+    echo "          not mount properly.  To start rpc.portmap at boot, change the"
+    echo "          permissions on /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap"
+    sleep 10
+  fi
+  echo "Mounting remote (NFS) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs      	 # This may be our /usr runtime!
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t nfs
+fi
+
+# Load the RPC portmapper if /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# This might be needed to mount NFS partitions that are not listed in /etc/fstab.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+fi
+
+# Mount remote (SMB) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w smbfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  echo "Mounting remote (SMB) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t smbfs
+fi
+
+# Start the system logger if it is not already running (maybe because /usr
+# is on a network partition).
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -d /var/log -a ! -r /var/run/syslogd.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# If there is a firewall script, run it before enabling packet forwarding.
+# See the HOWTOs on http://www.netfilter.org/ for documentation on
+# setting up a firewall or NAT on Linux.  In some cases this might need to
+# be moved past the section below dealing with IP packet forwarding.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall start
+fi
+
+# Turn on IPv4 packet forwarding support.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward start
+fi
+
+# Start the inetd server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd start
+fi
+
+# Start the OpenSSH SSH daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd ]; then
+  echo "Starting OpenSSH SSH daemon: /usr/sbin/sshd"
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd start
+fi
+
+# Start the BIND name server daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.bind ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.bind start
+fi
+
+# Start NIS (the Network Information Service):
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.yp ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.yp start
+fi
+
+# Start the NFS server.   Note that for this to work correctly, you'll
+# need to load the knfsd module for kernel NFS server support.
+# You'll also need to set up some shares in /etc/exports, and be sure
+# that /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# Starting the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd start
+fi
+
+# Stuff you won't need follows.  ;-)
+
+# # Start the network routing daemon:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/routed ]; then
+#   echo "Starting network routing daemon:  /usr/sbin/routed"
+#   /usr/sbin/routed -g -s
+# fi
+
+# # Start the system status server:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/rwhod ]; then
+#   echo "Starting system status server:  /usr/sbin/rwhod"
+#   /usr/sbin/rwhod
+# fi
+
+#  # Fire up the PC-NFS daemon(s).  This is a primarily obsolete system, and may
+#  # not be very secure.  It's not at all needed for normal NFS server support.
+#  # You probably should not run this.
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd ]; then
+#    echo "Starting PC-NFS daemons:  /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd"
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd ]; then
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fe1419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart inetd, the BSD Internet super-daemon.
+
+# Start inetd:
+inetd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/inetd ]; then
+    echo "Starting Internet super-server daemon:  /usr/sbin/inetd"
+    /usr/sbin/inetd
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop inetd:
+inetd_stop() {
+  killall inetd
+}
+
+# Restart inetd:
+inetd_restart() {
+  inetd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  inetd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  inetd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  inetd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  inetd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52bd2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward:  start/stop IP packet forwarding
+#
+# If you intend to run your Linux box as a router, i.e. as a
+# computer that forwards and redistributes network packets, you
+# will need to enable IP packet forwarding in your kernel.
+#
+# To activate IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+#
+# To disable IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script non-executable:  chmod 644 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+
+# Start IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_start() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Activating IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+  # When using IPv4 packet forwarding, you will also get the
+  # rp_filter, which automatically rejects incoming packets if the
+  # routing table entry for their source address doesn't match the
+  # network interface they're arriving on.  This has security
+  # advantages because it prevents the so-called IP spoofing,
+  # however it can pose problems if you use asymmetric routing
+  # (packets from you to a host take a different path than packets
+  # from that host to you) or if you operate a non-routing host
+  # which has several IP addresses on different interfaces.  To
+  # turn rp_filter off, uncomment the lines below:
+  #if [ -r /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter ]; then
+  #  echo "Disabling rp_filter."
+  #  echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter
+  #fi
+}
+
+# Stop IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_stop() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Disabling IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_restart() {
+  ip_forward_stop
+  sleep 1
+  ip_forward_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  ip_forward_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  ip_forward_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  ip_forward_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..3cf2076
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.local:  Local system initialization script.
+#
+# Put any local setup commands in here:
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..239e2e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart mysqld.
+#
+# Copyright 2003 Patrick J. Volkerding, Concord, CA
+# Copyright 2003 Slackware Linux, Inc., Concord, CA
+#
+# This program comes with NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
+# You may redistribute copies of this program under the terms of the
+# GNU General Public License.
+
+# To start MySQL automatically at boot, be sure this script is executable:
+# chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
+
+# Before you can run MySQL, you must have a database.  To install an initial
+# database, do this as root:
+#
+#   su - mysql
+#   mysql_install_db
+#
+# Note that step one is becoming the mysql user.  It's important to do this
+# before making any changes to the database, or mysqld won't be able to write
+# to it later (this can be fixed with 'chown -R mysql.mysql /var/lib/mysql').
+
+# To disallow outside connections to the database (if you don't need them, this
+# is recommended to increase security), uncomment the next line:
+#SKIP="--skip-networking"
+
+# Start mysqld:
+mysqld_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/bin/mysqld_safe ]; then
+    # If there is an old PID file (no mysqld running), clean it up:
+    if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+      if ! ps ax | grep mysqld 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+        echo "Cleaning up old /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid."
+        rm -f /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid
+      fi
+    fi
+    /usr/bin/mysqld_safe --datadir=/var/lib/mysql --pid-file=/var/run/mysql/mysql.pid $SKIP &
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop mysqld:
+mysqld_stop() {
+  # If there is no PID file, ignore this request...
+  if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+    killall mysqld
+    # Wait at least one minute for it to exit, as we don't know how big the DB is...
+    for second in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \
+      0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 ; do
+      if [ ! -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+        break;
+      fi
+      sleep 1
+    done
+    if [ "$second" = "60" ]; then
+      echo "WARNING:  Gave up waiting for mysqld to exit!"
+      sleep 15
+    fi
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart mysqld:
+mysqld_restart() {
+  mysqld_stop
+  mysqld_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  mysqld_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  mysqld_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  mysqld_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc32367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+## Slackware init script for postfix
+##   20030828 Manolis Tzanidakis
+#
+
+postfix_start() {
+        if [ -x /usr/sbin/postfix ]; then
+                echo -n "Starting postfix MTA:  "
+                echo "/usr/sbin/postfix start"
+                /usr/sbin/postfix start 2>/dev/null
+        fi
+}
+
+postfix_stop() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix stop 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+postfix_restart() {
+        sh $0 stop
+	sleep 1
+        sh $0 start
+}
+
+postfix_reload() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix reload 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+        'start')
+                postfix_start
+                ;;
+        'stop')
+                postfix_stop
+                ;;
+        'restart')
+                postfix_restart
+                ;;
+        'reload')
+                postfix_reload
+                ;;
+        *)
+                echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart|reload"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a31c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart sendmail.
+
+# Start sendmail:
+sendmail_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/sendmail ]; then
+    echo "Starting sendmail MTA daemon: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m
+    echo "Starting sendmail MSP queue runner: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop sendmail:
+sendmail_stop() {
+  killall sendmail
+}
+
+# Restart sendmail:
+sendmail_restart() {
+  sendmail_stop
+  sleep 1
+  sendmail_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sendmail_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sendmail_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sendmail_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5f31c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+#
+# /etc/rc.serial 
+#	Initializes the serial ports on your system
+#
+# chkconfig: 2345 50 75
+# description: This initializes the settings of the serial port
+#
+# FILE_VERSION: 19981128
+#
+# Distributed with setserial and the serial driver.  We need to use the
+# FILE_VERSION field to assure that we don't overwrite a newer rc.serial 
+# file with a newer one.
+# 
+# XXXX For now, the autosave feature doesn't work if you are
+# using the multiport feature; it doesn't save the multiport configuration
+# (for now).  Autosave also doesn't work for the hayes devices.  
+#
+
+RCLOCKFILE=/var/lock/subsys/serial
+DIRS="/lib/modules/`uname -r`/misc /lib/modules /usr/lib/modules ."
+PATH=/bin:/sbin:/usr/bin
+DRIVER=serial
+DRIVER_NAME=serial
+MODULE_REGEXP="serial\b"
+
+ALLDEVS="/dev/ttyS?"
+if /bin/ls /dev/ttyS?? >& /dev/null ; then
+	ALLDEVS="$ALLDEVS /dev/ttyS??"
+fi
+
+SETSERIAL=""
+if test -x /bin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/bin/setserial
+elif test -x /sbin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/sbin/setserial
+fi
+
+#
+# See if the serial driver is loaded
+#
+LOADED=""
+if test -f /proc/devices; then
+	if grep -q " ttyS$" /proc/devices ; then
+		LOADED="yes"
+	else
+		LOADED="no"
+	fi
+fi
+
+#
+# Find the serial driver
+#
+for i in $DIRS
+do
+	if test -z "$MODULE" -a -f $i/$DRIVER.o ; then
+		MODULE=$i/$DRIVER.o
+	fi
+done
+
+if ! test -f /proc/modules ; then
+	MODULE=""
+fi
+
+#
+# Handle System V init conventions...
+#
+case $1 in
+start)
+	action="start";
+	;;
+stop)
+	action="stop";
+	;;
+*)
+	action="start";
+esac
+
+if test $action  = stop ; then
+	if test -n ${SETSERIAL} -a "$LOADED" != "no" -a \
+           `head -1 /etc/serial.conf`X = "###AUTOSAVE###X" ; then
+		echo -n "Saving state of serial devices... "
+		grep "^#" /etc/serial.conf > /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		${SETSERIAL} -G -g ${ALLDEVS} >> /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		mv /etc/serial.conf /etc/.serial.conf.old
+		mv /etc/.serial.conf.new /etc/serial.conf
+		echo "done."
+	fi
+	if test -n "$MODULE" ; then
+		module=`grep $MODULE_REGEXP /proc/modules | awk '{print $1}'`
+		if test -z "$module" ; then 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver is not loaded."
+			rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+			exit 0
+		fi
+		if rmmod $module ; then :; else 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver could NOT be unloaded."
+			exit 1;
+		fi
+		echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver has been unloaded."
+	fi
+	rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+	exit 0
+fi
+
+#
+# If not stop, it must be a start....
+#
+
+if test -n "$MODULE" -a "$LOADED" != "yes" ; then 
+	if insmod -f $MODULE $DRIVER_ARG ; then
+          true
+	else
+		echo "Couldn't load $DRIVER_NAME driver."
+		exit 1
+	fi
+fi
+
+if test -f /etc/serial.conf ; then
+        if test -n ${SETSERIAL} ; then
+		grep -v ^# < /etc/serial.conf | while read device args
+		do
+                    if [ ! "$device" = "" -a ! "$args" = "" ]; then
+                        ${SETSERIAL} -z $device $args
+                    fi
+		done 
+	fi
+else
+	echo "###AUTOSAVE###" > /etc/serial.conf
+fi
+
+touch ${RCLOCKFILE}
+${SETSERIAL} -bg ${ALLDEVS}
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a3707e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the secure shell server:
+
+sshd_start() {
+  # Create host keys if needed.
+  if [ ! -r /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa1 -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key -N '' 
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t dsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  /usr/sbin/sshd
+}
+
+sshd_stop() {
+  killall sshd
+}
+
+sshd_restart() {
+  if [ -r /var/run/sshd.pid ]; then
+    echo "WARNING: killing listener process only.  To kill every sshd process, you must"
+    echo "         use 'rc.sshd stop'.  'rc.sshd restart' kills only the parent sshd to"
+    echo "         allow an admin logged in through sshd to use 'rc.sshd restart' without"
+    echo "         being cut off.  If sshd has been upgraded, new connections will now"
+    echo "         use the new version, which should be a safe enough approach."
+    kill `cat /var/run/sshd.pid`
+  else
+    killall sshd
+  fi
+  sleep 1
+  sshd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sshd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sshd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sshd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a005fb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the system logging daemons.
+#
+# Written for Slackware Linux by Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>.
+
+syslogd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -x /usr/sbin/klogd ]; then
+    echo -n "Starting sysklogd daemons: "
+    echo -n "/usr/sbin/syslogd "
+    /usr/sbin/syslogd
+    sleep 1 # prevent syslogd/klogd race condition on SMP kernels
+    echo "/usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x"
+    # '-c 3' = display level 'error' or higher messages on console
+    # '-x' = turn off broken EIP translation
+    /usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x
+  fi
+}
+
+syslogd_stop() {
+  killall syslogd 2> /dev/null
+  killall klogd 2> /dev/null
+}
+
+syslogd_restart() {
+  syslogd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  syslogd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  syslogd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  syslogd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  syslogd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..916e59e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.sysvinit   This file provides basic compatibility with SystemV style
+#               startup scripts.  The SystemV style init system places 
+#               start/stop scripts for each runlevel into directories such as
+#               /etc/rc.d/rc3.d/ (for runlevel 3) instead of starting them
+#               from /etc/rc.d/rc.M.  This makes for a lot more init scripts,
+#               and a more complicated execution path to follow through if
+#               something goes wrong.  For this reason, Slackware has always
+#               used the traditional BSD style init script layout.
+#
+#               However, many binary packages exist that install SystemV
+#               init scripts.  With rc.sysvinit in place, most well-written
+#               startup scripts will work.  This is primarily intended to
+#               support commercial software, though, and probably shouldn't
+#               be considered bug free.
+#
+#               Written by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>, 1999
+#               from an example by Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@cistron.nl>.
+
+# Run an init script:
+startup() {
+  case "$1" in
+  *.sh)
+    sh "$@"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    "$@"
+    ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+# Set onlcr to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr 0>&1
+
+if [ "$runlevel" = "" ]; then
+  runlevel=$RUNLEVEL
+  export runlevel
+  prevlevel=$PREVLEVEL
+  export prevlevel
+fi
+
+# Run kill scripts in the previous runlevel if not "none"
+if [ ! "$prevlevel" = "N" ]; then
+  for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$prevlevel.d/K* ; do
+    if [ -x $script ]; then
+      startup $script stop
+    fi
+  done
+fi
+
+# Now do the startup scripts:
+for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$runlevel.d/S* ; do
+  if [ -x $script ]; then
+    startup $script start
+  fi
+done
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a74acc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/rssh.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# This is the default rssh config file
+
+# set the log facility.  "LOG_USER" and "user" are equivalent.
+logfacility = LOG_USER 
+
+# Leave these all commented out to make the default action for rssh to lock
+# users out completely...
+
+allowscp
+allowsftp
+#allowcvs
+#allowrdist
+#allowrsync
+
+# set the default umask
+umask = 022
+
+# If you want to chroot users, use this to set the directory where the root of
+# the chroot jail will be located.
+#
+# if you DO NOT want to chroot users, LEAVE THIS COMMENTED OUT.
+# You can quote anywhere, but quotes not required unless path contains a
+# space... as in this example.
+
+chrootpath = "/var/users"
+
+##########################################
+# EXAMPLES of configuring per-user options
+
+#user=rudy:077:00010:  # the path can simply be left out to not chroot
+#user=rudy:077:00010   # the ending colon is optional
+
+#spaces in the path must be quoted...
+#user=rudy:011:00001:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # scp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00010:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # sftp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00011:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # both with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00100:  # cvs, with no chroot 
+#user=rudy:011:01000:  # rdist, with no chroot
+#user=rudy:011:10000:  # rsync, with no chroot
+#user="rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # whole user string can be quoted
+#user=rudy:01"1:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # or somewhere in the middle, freak!
+#user=rudy:'011:00001:/usr/local/chroot'  # single quotes too
+
+# Spaces before or after the '=' are fine, but spaces in chrootpath need
+# quotes.
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  # neither do comments at line end
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a161fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#	$OpenBSD: sshd_config,v 1.69 2004/05/23 23:59:53 dtucker Exp $
+
+# This is the sshd server system-wide configuration file.  See
+# sshd_config(5) for more information.
+
+# This sshd was compiled with PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin
+
+# The strategy used for options in the default sshd_config shipped with
+# OpenSSH is to specify options with their default value where
+# possible, but leave them commented.  Uncommented options change a
+# default value.
+
+#Port 22
+#Protocol 2,1
+#ListenAddress 0.0.0.0
+#ListenAddress ::
+
+# HostKey for protocol version 1
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key
+# HostKeys for protocol version 2
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key
+
+# Lifetime and size of ephemeral version 1 server key
+#KeyRegenerationInterval 1h
+#ServerKeyBits 768
+
+# Logging
+#obsoletes QuietMode and FascistLogging
+#SyslogFacility AUTH
+#LogLevel INFO
+
+# Authentication:
+
+#LoginGraceTime 2m
+PermitRootLogin no
+#StrictModes yes
+#MaxAuthTries 6
+
+#RSAAuthentication yes
+#PubkeyAuthentication yes
+#AuthorizedKeysFile	.ssh/authorized_keys
+
+# For this to work you will also need host keys in /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
+#RhostsRSAAuthentication no
+# similar for protocol version 2
+#HostbasedAuthentication no
+# Change to yes if you don't trust ~/.ssh/known_hosts for
+# RhostsRSAAuthentication and HostbasedAuthentication
+#IgnoreUserKnownHosts no
+# Don't read the user's ~/.rhosts and ~/.shosts files
+#IgnoreRhosts yes
+
+# To disable tunneled clear text passwords, change to no here!
+#PasswordAuthentication yes
+#PermitEmptyPasswords no
+
+# Change to no to disable s/key passwords
+#ChallengeResponseAuthentication yes
+
+# Kerberos options
+#KerberosAuthentication no
+#KerberosOrLocalPasswd yes
+#KerberosTicketCleanup yes
+#KerberosGetAFSToken no
+
+# GSSAPI options
+#GSSAPIAuthentication no
+#GSSAPICleanupCredentials yes
+
+# Set this to 'yes' to enable PAM authentication, account processing, 
+# and session processing. If this is enabled, PAM authentication will 
+# be allowed through the ChallengeResponseAuthentication mechanism. 
+# Depending on your PAM configuration, this may bypass the setting of 
+# PasswordAuthentication, PermitEmptyPasswords, and 
+# "PermitRootLogin without-password". If you just want the PAM account and 
+# session checks to run without PAM authentication, then enable this but set 
+# ChallengeResponseAuthentication=no
+#UsePAM no
+
+#AllowTcpForwarding yes
+#GatewayPorts no
+#X11Forwarding no
+#X11DisplayOffset 10
+#X11UseLocalhost yes
+#PrintMotd yes
+#PrintLastLog yes
+#TCPKeepAlive yes
+#UseLogin no
+#UsePrivilegeSeparation yes
+#PermitUserEnvironment no
+#Compression yes
+#ClientAliveInterval 0
+#ClientAliveCountMax 3
+#UseDNS yes
+#PidFile /var/run/sshd.pid
+#MaxStartups 10
+
+# no default banner path
+#Banner /some/path
+
+# override default of no subsystems
+Subsystem	sftp	/usr/libexec/sftp-server
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.d/var/www/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd23e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+security@slackware.com public key
+
+Type  bits/keyID    Date       User ID
+pub  1024D/40102233 2003-02-26 Slackware Linux Project <security@slackware.com>
+sub  1024g/4E523569 2003-02-26 [expires: 2012-12-21]
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.1 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=H5uu
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+
+slamd64 public key
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.6 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=D1wm
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..992ba79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73985d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+if [ "" = "" ] ; then
+PROFILE=prod
+fi
+# Select the IP number assigned to the virtual server
+# This IP must be one IP of the server, either an interface
+# or an IP alias
+# A vserver may have more than one IP. Separate them with spaces.
+# do not forget double quotes.
+# Some examples:
+# IPROOT="1.2.3.4 2.3.4.5"
+# IPROOT="eth0:1.2.3.4 eth1:2.3.4.5"
+# If the device is not specified, IPROOTDEV is used
+case $PROFILE in
+prod)
+#IPROOT=143.106.35.156
+IPROOT="eth0:192.168.0.1"
+# The netmask and broadcast are computed by default from IPROOTDEV
+#IPROOTMASK=
+#IPROOTBCAST=
+# You can define on which device the IP alias will be done
+# The IP alias will be set when the server is started and unset
+# when the server is stopped
+#IPROOTDEV=eth0
+# You can set a different host name for the vserver
+# If empty, the host name of the main server is used
+S_HOSTNAME=skel
+;;
+backup)
+IPROOT=1.2.3.4
+#IPROOTMASK=
+#IPROOTBCAST=
+#IPROOTDEV=eth0
+S_HOSTNAME=
+;;
+esac
+# Uncomment the onboot line if you want to enable this
+# virtual server at boot time
+#ONBOOT=yes
+# You can set a different NIS domain for the vserver
+# If empty, the current on is kept
+# Set it to "none" to have no NIS domain set
+S_DOMAINNAME=
+# You can set the priority level (nice) of all process in the vserver
+# Even root won't be able to raise it
+S_NICE=
+# You can set various flags for the new security context
+# lock: Prevent the vserver from setting new security context
+# sched: Merge scheduler priority of all processes in the vserver
+#        so that it acts a like a single one.
+# nproc: Limit the number of processes in the vserver according to ulimit
+#        (instead of a per user limit, this becomes a per vserver limit)
+# private: No other process can join this security context. Even root
+# Do not forget the quotes around the flags
+S_FLAGS="lock nproc"
+# You can set various ulimit flags and they will be inherited by the
+# vserver. You enter here various command line argument of ulimit
+# ULIMIT="-HS -u 200"
+# The example above, combined with the nproc S_FLAGS will limit the
+# vserver to a maximum of 200 processes
+ULIMIT="-HS -u 1000"
+# You can set various capabilities. By default, the vserver are run
+# with a limited set, so you can let root run in a vserver and not
+# worry about it. He can't take over the machine. In some cases
+# you can to give a little more capabilities (such as CAP_NET_RAW)
+# S_CAPS="CAP_NET_RAW"
+S_CAPS="CAP_SETGID"
+# Select an unused context (this is optional)
+# The default is to allocate a free context on the fly
+# In general you don't need to force a context
+#S_CONTEXT=
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f243ea0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.s/vserver-legacy.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# legacy vserver template
+#
+
+DEVICES="/etc/simplepkg/vserver-legacy.s/devices.tar.gz"
+GPGKEY="/etc/simplepkg/vserver-legacy.s/GPG-KEY"
+SKEL="/etc/simplepkg/vserver-legacy.s/skel.conf"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+cp /etc/resolv.conf $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 defaults 1 1 > $1/$2/etc/fstab                                                           
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 rw 0 0 > $1/$2/etc/mtab                                                                  
+
+echo "creating devices and dependencies"
+if [ -f "$DEVICES" ]; then
+  cd $1/$2/
+  tar zxvf $DEVICES
+  chroot $1/$2/ sbin/ldconfig
+else
+  echo error: device template $DEVICES not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$SKEL" ]; then
+  echo "creating /etc/vservers/$2.conf"                                                                                     
+  cp $SKEL /etc/vservers/$2.conf
+else
+  echo error: config file template $SKEL not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$GPGKEY" ]; then
+  echo "importing slack gpg pubkey"                                                                                  
+  mkdir $1/$2/root/.gnupg                                                                                        
+  gpg --homedir $1/$2/root/.gnupg --import $GPGKEY
+fi
+
+# todo: add rebootmgr
+echo "done; now edit /etc/vservers/$2.conf"
+echo "then, set all desired iptables rules and start $server vserver"
+echo "dont forget to change root's password with the command "vserver $2 exec passwd"" 
diff --git a/templates/vserver-legacy.template b/templates/vserver-legacy.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b810e32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver-legacy.template
@@ -0,0 +1,251 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+gettext: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+less: ADD
+logrotate: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+util-linux: ADD
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+bc: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+sudo: OPT
+vim: OPT
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+libidn: REC
+libxml2: REC
+mhash: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+curl: OPT
+gnupg: OPT
+htdig: OPT
+inetd: REC
+lftp: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+mod_ssl: OPT
+nail: REC
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpip: REC
+wget: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# extra
+libsafe
+# contrib
+simplepkg
+ssmtp
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b7115d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/httpd.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1046 @@
+##
+## httpd.conf -- Apache HTTP server configuration file
+##
+
+#
+# Based upon the NCSA server configuration files originally by Rob McCool.
+#
+# This is the main Apache server configuration file.  It contains the
+# configuration directives that give the server its instructions.
+# See <URL:http://httpd.apache.org/docs/> for detailed information about
+# the directives.
+#
+# Do NOT simply read the instructions in here without understanding
+# what they do.  They're here only as hints or reminders.  If you are unsure
+# consult the online docs. You have been warned.  
+#
+# After this file is processed, the server will look for and process
+# /etc/apache/srm.conf and then /etc/apache/access.conf
+# unless you have overridden these with ResourceConfig and/or
+# AccessConfig directives here.
+#
+# The configuration directives are grouped into three basic sections:
+#  1. Directives that control the operation of the Apache server process as a
+#     whole (the 'global environment').
+#  2. Directives that define the parameters of the 'main' or 'default' server,
+#     which responds to requests that aren't handled by a virtual host.
+#     These directives also provide default values for the settings
+#     of all virtual hosts.
+#  3. Settings for virtual hosts, which allow Web requests to be sent to
+#     different IP addresses or hostnames and have them handled by the
+#     same Apache server process.
+#
+# Configuration and logfile names: If the filenames you specify for many
+# of the server's control files begin with "/" (or "drive:/" for Win32), the
+# server will use that explicit path.  If the filenames do *not* begin
+# with "/", the value of ServerRoot is prepended -- so "logs/foo.log"
+# with ServerRoot set to "/usr/local/apache" will be interpreted by the
+# server as "/usr/local/apache/logs/foo.log".
+#
+
+### Section 1: Global Environment
+#
+# The directives in this section affect the overall operation of Apache,
+# such as the number of concurrent requests it can handle or where it
+# can find its configuration files.
+#
+
+#
+# ServerType is either inetd, or standalone.  Inetd mode is only supported on
+# Unix platforms.
+#
+ServerType standalone
+
+# ServerTokens directive
+ServerTokens ProductOnly
+
+#
+# ServerRoot: The top of the directory tree under which the server's
+# configuration, error, and log files are kept.
+#
+# NOTE!  If you intend to place this on an NFS (or otherwise network)
+# mounted filesystem then please read the LockFile documentation
+# (available at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/mod/core.html#lockfile>);
+# you will save yourself a lot of trouble.
+#
+ServerRoot "/usr"
+
+#
+# The LockFile directive sets the path to the lockfile used when Apache
+# is compiled with either USE_FCNTL_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT or
+# USE_FLOCK_SERIALIZED_ACCEPT. This directive should normally be left at
+# its default value. The main reason for changing it is if the logs
+# directory is NFS mounted, since the lockfile MUST BE STORED ON A LOCAL
+# DISK. The PID of the main server process is automatically appended to
+# the filename. 
+#
+#LockFile /var/run/httpd.lock
+
+#
+# PidFile: The file in which the server should record its process
+# identification number when it starts.
+#
+PidFile /var/run/httpd.pid
+
+#
+# ScoreBoardFile: File used to store internal server process information.
+# Not all architectures require this.  But if yours does (you'll know because
+# this file will be  created when you run Apache) then you *must* ensure that
+# no two invocations of Apache share the same scoreboard file.
+#
+ScoreBoardFile /var/run/httpd.scoreboard
+
+#
+# In the standard configuration, the server will process httpd.conf (this 
+# file, specified by the -f command line option), srm.conf, and access.conf 
+# in that order.  The latter two files are now distributed empty, as it is 
+# recommended that all directives be kept in a single file for simplicity.  
+# The commented-out values below are the built-in defaults.  You can have the 
+# server ignore these files altogether by using "/dev/null" (for Unix) or
+# "nul" (for Win32) for the arguments to the directives.
+#
+#ResourceConfig /etc/apache/srm.conf
+#AccessConfig /etc/apache/access.conf
+
+#
+# Timeout: The number of seconds before receives and sends time out.
+#
+Timeout 300
+
+#
+# KeepAlive: Whether or not to allow persistent connections (more than
+# one request per connection). Set to "Off" to deactivate.
+#
+KeepAlive On
+
+#
+# MaxKeepAliveRequests: The maximum number of requests to allow
+# during a persistent connection. Set to 0 to allow an unlimited amount.
+# We recommend you leave this number high, for maximum performance.
+#
+MaxKeepAliveRequests 100
+
+#
+# KeepAliveTimeout: Number of seconds to wait for the next request from the
+# same client on the same connection.
+#
+KeepAliveTimeout 2
+
+#
+# Server-pool size regulation.  Rather than making you guess how many
+# server processes you need, Apache dynamically adapts to the load it
+# sees --- that is, it tries to maintain enough server processes to
+# handle the current load, plus a few spare servers to handle transient
+# load spikes (e.g., multiple simultaneous requests from a single
+# Netscape browser).
+#
+# It does this by periodically checking how many servers are waiting
+# for a request.  If there are fewer than MinSpareServers, it creates
+# a new spare.  If there are more than MaxSpareServers, some of the
+# spares die off.  The default values are probably OK for most sites.
+#
+MinSpareServers 5
+MaxSpareServers 10
+
+#
+# Number of servers to start initially --- should be a reasonable ballpark
+# figure.
+#
+StartServers 5
+
+#
+# Limit on total number of servers running, i.e., limit on the number
+# of clients who can simultaneously connect --- if this limit is ever
+# reached, clients will be LOCKED OUT, so it should NOT BE SET TOO LOW.
+# It is intended mainly as a brake to keep a runaway server from taking
+# the system with it as it spirals down...
+#
+MaxClients 150
+
+#
+# MaxRequestsPerChild: the number of requests each child process is
+# allowed to process before the child dies.  The child will exit so
+# as to avoid problems after prolonged use when Apache (and maybe the
+# libraries it uses) leak memory or other resources.  On most systems, this
+# isn't really needed, but a few (such as Solaris) do have notable leaks
+# in the libraries. For these platforms, set to something like 10000
+# or so; a setting of 0 means unlimited.
+#
+# NOTE: This value does not include keepalive requests after the initial
+#       request per connection. For example, if a child process handles
+#       an initial request and 10 subsequent "keptalive" requests, it
+#       would only count as 1 request towards this limit.
+#
+MaxRequestsPerChild 0
+
+#
+# Listen: Allows you to bind Apache to specific IP addresses and/or
+# ports, instead of the default. See also the <VirtualHost>
+# directive.
+#
+#Listen 3000
+#Listen 12.34.56.78:80
+
+#
+# BindAddress: You can support virtual hosts with this option. This directive
+# is used to tell the server which IP address to listen to. It can either
+# contain "*", an IP address, or a fully qualified Internet domain name.
+# See also the <VirtualHost> and Listen directives.
+#
+#BindAddress *
+
+#
+# Dynamic Shared Object (DSO) Support
+#
+# To be able to use the functionality of a module which was built as a DSO you
+# have to place corresponding `LoadModule' lines at this location so the
+# directives contained in it are actually available _before_ they are used.
+# Please read the file http://httpd.apache.org/docs/dso.html for more
+# details about the DSO mechanism and run `httpd -l' for the list of already
+# built-in (statically linked and thus always available) modules in your httpd
+# binary.
+#
+# Note: The order in which modules are loaded is important.  Don't change
+# the order below without expert advice.
+#
+# Example:
+# LoadModule foo_module libexec/mod_foo.so
+LoadModule vhost_alias_module libexec/apache/mod_vhost_alias.so
+#LoadModule env_module         libexec/apache/mod_env.so
+LoadModule define_module      libexec/apache/mod_define.so
+LoadModule config_log_module  libexec/apache/mod_log_config.so
+LoadModule mime_magic_module  libexec/apache/mod_mime_magic.so
+LoadModule mime_module        libexec/apache/mod_mime.so
+LoadModule negotiation_module libexec/apache/mod_negotiation.so
+#LoadModule status_module      libexec/apache/mod_status.so
+#LoadModule info_module        libexec/apache/mod_info.so
+LoadModule includes_module    libexec/apache/mod_include.so
+LoadModule autoindex_module   libexec/apache/mod_autoindex.so
+LoadModule dir_module         libexec/apache/mod_dir.so
+LoadModule cgi_module         libexec/apache/mod_cgi.so
+#LoadModule asis_module        libexec/apache/mod_asis.so
+#LoadModule imap_module        libexec/apache/mod_imap.so
+#LoadModule action_module      libexec/apache/mod_actions.so
+#LoadModule speling_module     libexec/apache/mod_speling.so
+#LoadModule userdir_module     libexec/apache/mod_userdir.so
+LoadModule alias_module       libexec/apache/mod_alias.so
+LoadModule rewrite_module     libexec/apache/mod_rewrite.so
+LoadModule access_module      libexec/apache/mod_access.so
+LoadModule auth_module        libexec/apache/mod_auth.so
+LoadModule anon_auth_module   libexec/apache/mod_auth_anon.so
+#LoadModule dbm_auth_module    libexec/apache/mod_auth_dbm.so
+#LoadModule digest_module      libexec/apache/mod_digest.so
+LoadModule proxy_module       libexec/apache/libproxy.so
+LoadModule cern_meta_module   libexec/apache/mod_cern_meta.so
+LoadModule expires_module     libexec/apache/mod_expires.so
+LoadModule headers_module     libexec/apache/mod_headers.so
+#LoadModule usertrack_module   libexec/apache/mod_usertrack.so
+#LoadModule log_forensic_module libexec/apache/mod_log_forensic.so
+#LoadModule unique_id_module   libexec/apache/mod_unique_id.so
+LoadModule setenvif_module    libexec/apache/mod_setenvif.so
+
+#  Reconstruction of the complete module list from all available modules
+#  (static and shared ones) to achieve correct module execution order.
+#  [WHENEVER YOU CHANGE THE LOADMODULE SECTION ABOVE UPDATE THIS, TOO]
+ClearModuleList
+AddModule mod_vhost_alias.c
+#AddModule mod_env.c
+AddModule mod_define.c
+AddModule mod_log_config.c
+AddModule mod_mime_magic.c
+AddModule mod_mime.c
+AddModule mod_negotiation.c
+#AddModule mod_status.c
+#AddModule mod_info.c
+AddModule mod_include.c
+AddModule mod_autoindex.c
+AddModule mod_dir.c
+AddModule mod_cgi.c
+#AddModule mod_asis.c
+#AddModule mod_imap.c
+#AddModule mod_actions.c
+#AddModule mod_speling.c
+#AddModule mod_userdir.c
+AddModule mod_alias.c
+AddModule mod_rewrite.c
+AddModule mod_access.c
+AddModule mod_auth.c
+AddModule mod_auth_anon.c
+#AddModule mod_auth_dbm.c
+#AddModule mod_digest.c
+AddModule mod_proxy.c
+AddModule mod_cern_meta.c
+AddModule mod_expires.c
+AddModule mod_headers.c
+#AddModule mod_usertrack.c
+#AddModule mod_log_forensic.c
+#AddModule mod_unique_id.c
+AddModule mod_so.c
+AddModule mod_setenvif.c
+
+#
+# ExtendedStatus controls whether Apache will generate "full" status
+# information (ExtendedStatus On) or just basic information (ExtendedStatus
+# Off) when the "server-status" handler is called. The default is Off.
+#
+#ExtendedStatus On
+
+### Section 2: 'Main' server configuration
+#
+# The directives in this section set up the values used by the 'main'
+# server, which responds to any requests that aren't handled by a
+# <VirtualHost> definition.  These values also provide defaults for
+# any <VirtualHost> containers you may define later in the file.
+#
+# All of these directives may appear inside <VirtualHost> containers,
+# in which case these default settings will be overridden for the
+# virtual host being defined.
+#
+
+#
+# If your ServerType directive (set earlier in the 'Global Environment'
+# section) is set to "inetd", the next few directives don't have any
+# effect since their settings are defined by the inetd configuration.
+# Skip ahead to the ServerAdmin directive.
+#
+
+#
+# Port: The port to which the standalone server listens. For
+# ports < 1023, you will need httpd to be run as root initially.
+#
+Port 80
+
+#
+# If you wish httpd to run as a different user or group, you must run
+# httpd as root initially and it will switch.  
+#
+# User/Group: The name (or #number) of the user/group to run httpd as.
+#  . On SCO (ODT 3) use "User nouser" and "Group nogroup".
+#  . On HPUX you may not be able to use shared memory as nobody, and the
+#    suggested workaround is to create a user www and use that user.
+#  NOTE that some kernels refuse to setgid(Group) or semctl(IPC_SET)
+#  when the value of (unsigned)Group is above 60000; 
+#  don't use Group "#-1" on these systems!
+#
+User nobody
+Group nobody
+
+#
+# ServerAdmin: Your address, where problems with the server should be
+# e-mailed.  This address appears on some server-generated pages, such
+# as error documents.
+#
+ServerAdmin root@midas.slackware.lan
+
+#
+# ServerName allows you to set a host name which is sent back to clients for
+# your server if it's different than the one the program would get (i.e., use
+# "www" instead of the host's real name).
+#
+# Note: You cannot just invent host names and hope they work. The name you 
+# define here must be a valid DNS name for your host. If you don't understand
+# this, ask your network administrator.
+# If your host doesn't have a registered DNS name, enter its IP address here.
+# You will have to access it by its address (e.g., http://123.45.67.89/)
+# anyway, and this will make redirections work in a sensible way.
+#
+# 127.0.0.1 is the TCP/IP local loop-back address, often named localhost. Your 
+# machine always knows itself by this address. If you use Apache strictly for 
+# local testing and development, you may use 127.0.0.1 as the server name.
+#
+#ServerName www.example.com
+
+#
+# DocumentRoot: The directory out of which you will serve your
+# documents. By default, all requests are taken from this directory, but
+# symbolic links and aliases may be used to point to other locations.
+#
+DocumentRoot "/var/www/htdocs"
+
+#
+# Each directory to which Apache has access, can be configured with respect
+# to which services and features are allowed and/or disabled in that
+# directory (and its subdirectories). 
+#
+# First, we configure the "default" to be a very restrictive set of 
+# permissions.  
+#
+<Directory />
+    Options FollowSymLinks
+    AllowOverride None
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# Note that from this point forward you must specifically allow
+# particular features to be enabled - so if something's not working as
+# you might expect, make sure that you have specifically enabled it
+# below.
+#
+
+#
+# This should be changed to whatever you set DocumentRoot to.
+#
+<Directory "/var/www/htdocs">
+
+#
+# This may also be "None", "All", or any combination of "Indexes",
+# "Includes", "FollowSymLinks", "ExecCGI", or "MultiViews".
+#
+# Note that "MultiViews" must be named *explicitly* --- "Options All"
+# doesn't give it to you.
+#
+    Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+
+#
+# This controls which options the .htaccess files in directories can
+# override. Can also be "All", or any combination of "Options", "FileInfo", 
+# "AuthConfig", and "Limit"
+#
+    AllowOverride None
+
+#
+# Controls who can get stuff from this server.
+#
+    Order allow,deny
+    Allow from all
+</Directory>
+
+#
+# UserDir: The name of the directory which is appended onto a user's home
+# directory if a ~user request is received.
+#
+<IfModule mod_userdir.c>
+    UserDir public_html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# Control access to UserDir directories.  The following is an example
+# for a site where these directories are restricted to read-only.
+#
+#<Directory /home/*/public_html>
+#    AllowOverride FileInfo AuthConfig Limit
+#    Options MultiViews Indexes SymLinksIfOwnerMatch IncludesNoExec
+#    <Limit GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order allow,deny
+#        Allow from all
+#    </Limit>
+#    <LimitExcept GET POST OPTIONS PROPFIND>
+#        Order deny,allow
+#        Deny from all
+#    </LimitExcept>
+#</Directory>
+
+#
+# DirectoryIndex: Name of the file or files to use as a pre-written HTML
+# directory index.  Separate multiple entries with spaces.
+#
+<IfModule mod_dir.c>
+    DirectoryIndex index.html
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# AccessFileName: The name of the file to look for in each directory
+# for access control information.
+#
+AccessFileName .htaccess
+
+#
+# The following lines prevent .htaccess files from being viewed by
+# Web clients.  Since .htaccess files often contain authorization
+# information, access is disallowed for security reasons.  Comment
+# these lines out if you want Web visitors to see the contents of
+# .htaccess files.  If you change the AccessFileName directive above,
+# be sure to make the corresponding changes here.
+#
+# Also, folks tend to use names such as .htpasswd for password
+# files, so this will protect those as well.
+#
+<Files ~ "^\.ht">
+    Order allow,deny
+    Deny from all
+    Satisfy All
+</Files>
+
+#
+# CacheNegotiatedDocs: By default, Apache sends "Pragma: no-cache" with each
+# document that was negotiated on the basis of content. This asks proxy
+# servers not to cache the document. Uncommenting the following line disables
+# this behavior, and proxies will be allowed to cache the documents.
+#
+#CacheNegotiatedDocs
+
+#
+# UseCanonicalName:  (new for 1.3)  With this setting turned on, whenever
+# Apache needs to construct a self-referencing URL (a URL that refers back
+# to the server the response is coming from) it will use ServerName and
+# Port to form a "canonical" name.  With this setting off, Apache will
+# use the hostname:port that the client supplied, when possible.  This
+# also affects SERVER_NAME and SERVER_PORT in CGI scripts.
+#
+UseCanonicalName On
+
+#
+# TypesConfig describes where the mime.types file (or equivalent) is
+# to be found.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+    TypesConfig /etc/apache/mime.types
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# DefaultType is the default MIME type the server will use for a document
+# if it cannot otherwise determine one, such as from filename extensions.
+# If your server contains mostly text or HTML documents, "text/plain" is
+# a good value.  If most of your content is binary, such as applications
+# or images, you may want to use "application/octet-stream" instead to
+# keep browsers from trying to display binary files as though they are
+# text.
+#
+DefaultType text/plain
+
+#
+# The mod_mime_magic module allows the server to use various hints from the
+# contents of the file itself to determine its type.  The MIMEMagicFile
+# directive tells the module where the hint definitions are located.
+# mod_mime_magic is not part of the default server (you have to add
+# it yourself with a LoadModule [see the DSO paragraph in the 'Global
+# Environment' section], or recompile the server and include mod_mime_magic
+# as part of the configuration), so it's enclosed in an <IfModule> container.
+# This means that the MIMEMagicFile directive will only be processed if the
+# module is part of the server.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime_magic.c>
+    MIMEMagicFile /etc/apache/magic
+</IfModule>
+
+#
+# HostnameLookups: Log the names of clients or just their IP addresses
+# e.g., www.apache.org (on) or 204.62.129.132 (off).
+# The default is off because it'd be overall better for the net if people
+# had to knowingly turn this feature on, since enabling it means that
+# each client request will result in AT LEAST one lookup request to the
+# nameserver.
+#
+HostnameLookups Off
+
+#
+# ErrorLog: The location of the error log file.
+# If you do not specify an ErrorLog directive within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, error messages relating to that virtual host will be
+# logged here.  If you *do* define an error logfile for a <VirtualHost>
+# container, that host's errors will be logged there and not here.
+#
+ErrorLog "| /usr/bin/error-log.sh /var/log/apache/error_log"
+
+#
+# LogLevel: Control the number of messages logged to the error_log.
+# Possible values include: debug, info, notice, warn, error, crit,
+# alert, emerg.
+#
+LogLevel warn
+
+#
+# The following directives define some format nicknames for use with
+# a CustomLog directive (see below).
+#
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b \"%{Referer}i\" \"%{User-Agent}i\"" combined
+LogFormat "%l %u %t \"%r\" %>s %b" common
+LogFormat "%{Referer}i -> %U" referer
+LogFormat "%{User-agent}i" agent
+
+#
+# The location and format of the access logfile (Common Logfile Format).
+# If you do not define any access logfiles within a <VirtualHost>
+# container, they will be logged here.  Contrariwise, if you *do*
+# define per-<VirtualHost> access logfiles, transactions will be
+# logged therein and *not* in this file.
+#
+CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log common
+
+#
+# If you would like to have agent and referer logfiles, uncomment the
+# following directives.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/referer_log referer
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/agent_log agent
+
+#
+# If you prefer a single logfile with access, agent, and referer information
+# (Combined Logfile Format) you can use the following directive.
+#
+#CustomLog /var/log/apache/access_log combined
+
+#
+# Optionally add a line containing the server version and virtual host
+# name to server-generated pages (error documents, FTP directory listings,
+# mod_status and mod_info output etc., but not CGI generated documents).
+# Set to "EMail" to also include a mailto: link to the ServerAdmin.
+# Set to one of:  On | Off | EMail
+#
+ServerSignature Off
+
+# EBCDIC configuration:
+# (only for mainframes using the EBCDIC codeset, currently one of:
+# Fujitsu-Siemens' BS2000/OSD, IBM's OS/390 and IBM's TPF)!!
+# The following default configuration assumes that "text files"
+# are stored in EBCDIC (so that you can operate on them using the
+# normal POSIX tools like grep and sort) while "binary files" are
+# stored with identical octets as on an ASCII machine.
+#
+# The directives are evaluated in configuration file order, with
+# the EBCDICConvert directives applied before EBCDICConvertByType.
+#
+# If you want to have ASCII HTML documents and EBCDIC HTML documents
+# at the same time, you can use the file extension to force
+# conversion off for the ASCII documents:
+# > AddType       text/html .ahtml
+# > EBCDICConvert Off=InOut .ahtml
+#
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut text/* message/* multipart/*
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=In    application/x-www-form-urlencoded
+# EBCDICConvertByType  On=InOut application/postscript model/vrml
+# EBCDICConvertByType Off=InOut */*
+
+
+#
+# Aliases: Add here as many aliases as you need (with no limit). The format is 
+# Alias fakename realname
+#
+<IfModule mod_alias.c>
+
+    #
+    # Note that if you include a trailing / on fakename then the server will
+    # require it to be present in the URL.  So "/icons" isn't aliased in this
+    # example, only "/icons/".  If the fakename is slash-terminated, then the 
+    # realname must also be slash terminated, and if the fakename omits the 
+    # trailing slash, the realname must also omit it.
+    #
+    Alias /icons/ "/var/www/icons/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/icons">
+        Options Indexes MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    # This Alias will project the on-line documentation tree under /manual/
+    # even if you change the DocumentRoot. Comment it if you don't want to 
+    # provide access to the on-line documentation.
+    #
+    Alias /manual/ "/var/www/htdocs/manual/"
+
+    <Directory "/var/www/htdocs/manual">
+        Options Indexes FollowSymlinks MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+    #
+    # ScriptAlias: This controls which directories contain server scripts.
+    # ScriptAliases are essentially the same as Aliases, except that
+    # documents in the realname directory are treated as applications and
+    # run by the server when requested rather than as documents sent to the client.
+    # The same rules about trailing "/" apply to ScriptAlias directives as to
+    # Alias.
+    #
+    ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/var/www/cgi-bin/"
+
+    #
+    # "/var/www/cgi-bin" should be changed to whatever your ScriptAliased
+    # CGI directory exists, if you have that configured.
+    #
+    <Directory "/var/www/cgi-bin">
+        AllowOverride None
+        Options None
+        Order allow,deny
+        Allow from all
+    </Directory>
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of aliases.
+
+#
+# Redirect allows you to tell clients about documents which used to exist in
+# your server's namespace, but do not anymore. This allows you to tell the
+# clients where to look for the relocated document.
+# Format: Redirect old-URI new-URL
+#
+
+#
+# Directives controlling the display of server-generated directory listings.
+#
+<IfModule mod_autoindex.c>
+
+    #
+    # FancyIndexing is whether you want fancy directory indexing or standard
+    #
+    IndexOptions FancyIndexing
+
+    #
+    # AddIcon* directives tell the server which icon to show for different
+    # files or filename extensions.  These are only displayed for
+    # FancyIndexed directories.
+    #
+    AddIconByEncoding (CMP,/icons/compressed.gif) x-compress x-gzip
+
+    AddIconByType (TXT,/icons/text.gif) text/*
+    AddIconByType (IMG,/icons/image2.gif) image/*
+    AddIconByType (SND,/icons/sound2.gif) audio/*
+    AddIconByType (VID,/icons/movie.gif) video/*
+
+    AddIcon /icons/binary.gif .bin .exe
+    AddIcon /icons/binhex.gif .hqx
+    AddIcon /icons/tar.gif .tar
+    AddIcon /icons/world2.gif .wrl .wrl.gz .vrml .vrm .iv
+    AddIcon /icons/compressed.gif .Z .z .tgz .gz .zip
+    AddIcon /icons/a.gif .ps .ai .eps
+    AddIcon /icons/layout.gif .html .shtml .htm .pdf
+    AddIcon /icons/text.gif .txt
+    AddIcon /icons/c.gif .c
+    AddIcon /icons/p.gif .pl .py
+    AddIcon /icons/f.gif .for
+    AddIcon /icons/dvi.gif .dvi
+    AddIcon /icons/uuencoded.gif .uu
+    AddIcon /icons/script.gif .conf .sh .shar .csh .ksh .tcl
+    AddIcon /icons/tex.gif .tex
+    AddIcon /icons/bomb.gif core
+
+    AddIcon /icons/back.gif ..
+    AddIcon /icons/hand.right.gif README
+    AddIcon /icons/folder.gif ^^DIRECTORY^^
+    AddIcon /icons/blank.gif ^^BLANKICON^^
+
+    #
+    # DefaultIcon is which icon to show for files which do not have an icon
+    # explicitly set.
+    #
+    DefaultIcon /icons/unknown.gif
+
+    #
+    # AddDescription allows you to place a short description after a file in
+    # server-generated indexes.  These are only displayed for FancyIndexed
+    # directories.
+    # Format: AddDescription "description" filename
+    #
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed document" .gz
+    #AddDescription "tar archive" .tar
+    #AddDescription "GZIP compressed tar archive" .tgz
+
+    #
+    # ReadmeName is the name of the README file the server will look for by
+    # default, and append to directory listings.
+    #
+    # HeaderName is the name of a file which should be prepended to
+    # directory indexes. 
+    #
+    ReadmeName README.html
+    HeaderName HEADER.html
+
+    #
+    # IndexIgnore is a set of filenames which directory indexing should ignore
+    # and not include in the listing.  Shell-style wildcarding is permitted.
+    #
+    IndexIgnore .??* *~ *# HEADER* README* RCS CVS *,v *,t
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of indexing directives.
+
+#
+# Document types.
+#
+<IfModule mod_mime.c>
+
+    #
+    # AddLanguage allows you to specify the language of a document. You can
+    # then use content negotiation to give a browser a file in a language
+    # it can understand.  
+    #
+    # Note 1: The suffix does not have to be the same as the language 
+    # keyword --- those with documents in Polish (whose net-standard 
+    # language code is pl) may wish to use "AddLanguage pl .po" to 
+    # avoid the ambiguity with the common suffix for perl scripts.
+    #
+    # Note 2: The example entries below illustrate that in quite
+    # some cases the two character 'Language' abbreviation is not
+    # identical to the two character 'Country' code for its country,
+    # E.g. 'Danmark/dk' versus 'Danish/da'.
+    #
+    # Note 3: In the case of 'ltz' we violate the RFC by using a three char 
+    # specifier. But there is 'work in progress' to fix this and get 
+    # the reference data for rfc1766 cleaned up.
+    #
+    # Danish (da) - Dutch (nl) - English (en) - Estonian (ee)
+    # French (fr) - German (de) - Greek-Modern (el)
+    # Italian (it) - Korean (kr) - Norwegian (no) - Norwegian Nynorsk (nn)
+    # Portugese (pt) - Luxembourgeois* (ltz)
+    # Spanish (es) - Swedish (sv) - Catalan (ca) - Czech(cs)
+    # Polish (pl) - Brazilian Portuguese (pt-br) - Japanese (ja)
+    # Russian (ru)
+    #
+    AddLanguage da .dk
+    AddLanguage nl .nl
+    AddLanguage en .en
+    AddLanguage et .ee
+    AddLanguage fr .fr
+    AddLanguage de .de
+    AddLanguage el .el
+    AddLanguage he .he
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-8 .iso8859-8
+    AddLanguage it .it
+    AddLanguage ja .ja
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-JP .jis
+    AddLanguage kr .kr
+    AddCharset ISO-2022-KR .iso-kr
+    AddLanguage nn .nn
+    AddLanguage no .no
+    AddLanguage pl .po
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-2 .iso-pl
+    AddLanguage pt .pt
+    AddLanguage pt-br .pt-br
+    AddLanguage ltz .lu
+    AddLanguage ca .ca
+    AddLanguage es .es
+    AddLanguage sv .sv
+    AddLanguage cs .cz .cs
+    AddLanguage ru .ru
+    AddLanguage zh-TW .zh-tw
+    AddCharset Big5         .Big5    .big5
+    AddCharset WINDOWS-1251 .cp-1251
+    AddCharset CP866        .cp866
+    AddCharset ISO-8859-5   .iso-ru
+    AddCharset KOI8-R       .koi8-r
+    AddCharset UCS-2        .ucs2
+    AddCharset UCS-4        .ucs4
+    AddCharset UTF-8        .utf8
+
+    # LanguagePriority allows you to give precedence to some languages
+    # in case of a tie during content negotiation.
+    #
+    # Just list the languages in decreasing order of preference. We have
+    # more or less alphabetized them here. You probably want to change this.
+    #
+    <IfModule mod_negotiation.c>
+        LanguagePriority en da nl et fr de el it ja kr no pl pt pt-br ru ltz ca es sv tw
+    </IfModule>
+
+    #
+    # AddType allows you to tweak mime.types without actually editing it, or to
+    # make certain files to be certain types.
+    #
+    AddType application/x-tar .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddEncoding allows you to have certain browsers uncompress
+    # information on the fly. Note: Not all browsers support this.
+    # Despite the name similarity, the following Add* directives have nothing
+    # to do with the FancyIndexing customization directives above.
+    #
+    AddEncoding x-compress .Z
+    AddEncoding x-gzip .gz .tgz
+    #
+    # If the AddEncoding directives above are commented-out, then you
+    # probably should define those extensions to indicate media types:
+    #
+    #AddType application/x-compress .Z
+    #AddType application/x-gzip .gz .tgz
+
+    #
+    # AddHandler allows you to map certain file extensions to "handlers",
+    # actions unrelated to filetype. These can be either built into the server
+    # or added with the Action command (see below)
+    #
+    # If you want to use server side includes, or CGI outside
+    # ScriptAliased directories, uncomment the following lines.
+    #
+    # To use CGI scripts:
+    #
+    #AddHandler cgi-script .cgi
+
+    #
+    # To use server-parsed HTML files
+    #
+    #AddType text/html .shtml
+    #AddHandler server-parsed .shtml
+
+    #
+    # Uncomment the following line to enable Apache's send-asis HTTP file
+    # feature
+    #
+    #AddHandler send-as-is asis
+
+    #
+    # If you wish to use server-parsed imagemap files, use
+    #
+    #AddHandler imap-file map
+
+    #
+    # To enable type maps, you might want to use
+    #
+    #AddHandler type-map var
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of document types.
+
+#
+# Action lets you define media types that will execute a script whenever
+# a matching file is called. This eliminates the need for repeated URL
+# pathnames for oft-used CGI file processors.
+# Format: Action media/type /cgi-script/location
+# Format: Action handler-name /cgi-script/location
+#
+
+#
+# MetaDir: specifies the name of the directory in which Apache can find
+# meta information files. These files contain additional HTTP headers
+# to include when sending the document
+#
+#MetaDir .web
+
+#
+# MetaSuffix: specifies the file name suffix for the file containing the
+# meta information.
+#
+#MetaSuffix .meta
+
+#
+# Customizable error response (Apache style)
+#  these come in three flavors
+#
+#    1) plain text
+ErrorDocument 500 /missing.html
+#  n.b.  the single leading (") marks it as text, it does not get output
+#
+#    2) local redirects
+ErrorDocument 404 /missing.html
+#  to redirect to local URL /missing.html
+#ErrorDocument 404 /cgi-bin/missing_handler.pl
+#  N.B.: You can redirect to a script or a document using server-side-includes.
+#
+#    3) external redirects
+ErrorDocument 402 /missing.html
+#  N.B.: Many of the environment variables associated with the original
+#  request will *not* be available to such a script.
+
+#
+# Customize behaviour based on the browser
+#
+<IfModule mod_setenvif.c>
+
+    #
+    # The following directives modify normal HTTP response behavior.
+    # The first directive disables keepalive for Netscape 2.x and browsers that
+    # spoof it. There are known problems with these browser implementations.
+    # The second directive is for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0b2
+    # which has a broken HTTP/1.1 implementation and does not properly
+    # support keepalive when it is used on 301 or 302 (redirect) responses.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "Mozilla/2" nokeepalive
+    BrowserMatch "MSIE 4\.0b2;" nokeepalive downgrade-1.0 force-response-1.0
+
+    #
+    # The following directive disables HTTP/1.1 responses to browsers which
+    # are in violation of the HTTP/1.0 spec by not being able to grok a
+    # basic 1.1 response.
+    #
+    BrowserMatch "RealPlayer 4\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "Java/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+    BrowserMatch "JDK/1\.0" force-response-1.0
+
+</IfModule>
+# End of browser customization directives
+
+#
+# Allow server status reports, with the URL of http://servername/server-status
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-status>
+#    SetHandler server-status
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# Allow remote server configuration reports, with the URL of
+# http://servername/server-info (requires that mod_info.c be loaded).
+# Change the ".example.com" to match your domain to enable.
+#
+#<Location /server-info>
+#    SetHandler server-info
+#    Order deny,allow
+#    Deny from all
+#    Allow from .example.com
+#</Location>
+
+#
+# There have been reports of people trying to abuse an old bug from pre-1.1
+# days.  This bug involved a CGI script distributed as a part of Apache.
+# By uncommenting these lines you can redirect these attacks to a logging 
+# script on phf.apache.org.  Or, you can record them yourself, using the script
+# support/phf_abuse_log.cgi.
+#
+#<Location /cgi-bin/phf*>
+#    Deny from all
+#    ErrorDocument 403 http://phf.apache.org/phf_abuse_log.cgi
+#</Location>
+
+### Section 3: Virtual Hosts
+#
+# VirtualHost: If you want to maintain multiple domains/hostnames on your
+# machine you can setup VirtualHost containers for them. Most configurations
+# use only name-based virtual hosts so the server doesn't need to worry about
+# IP addresses. This is indicated by the asterisks in the directives below.
+#
+# Please see the documentation at <URL:http://www.apache.org/docs/vhosts/>
+# for further details before you try to setup virtual hosts.
+#
+# You may use the command line option '-S' to verify your virtual host
+# configuration.
+
+#
+# Use name-based virtual hosting.
+#
+#NameVirtualHost *:80
+
+#
+# VirtualHost example:
+# Almost any Apache directive may go into a VirtualHost container.
+# The first VirtualHost section is used for requests without a known
+# server name.
+#
+#<VirtualHost *:80>
+#    ServerAdmin webmaster@dummy-host.example.com
+#    DocumentRoot /www/docs/dummy-host.example.com
+#    ServerName dummy-host.example.com
+#    ErrorLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-error_log
+#    CustomLog logs/dummy-host.example.com-access_log common
+#</VirtualHost>
+
+# By default, all external Apache modules are disabled.  To enable a particular
+# module for Apache, make sure the necessary packages are installed.  Then
+# uncomment the appropriate Include line below, save the file, and restart
+# Apache.  Note that some modules may need additional configuration steps.  For
+# example, mod_ssl requires a site certificate which you may need to generate.
+#
+# Lastly, if you remove a module package, be sure to edit this file and comment
+# out the appropriate Include line.
+
+# ==> mod_php configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  openssl-solibs (A series) and/or openssl (N series),
+#                     mysql (AP series), gmp (L series), mhash (L series),
+#                     and apache (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_php.conf
+
+# ==> mod_ssl configuration settings <==
+#
+# PACKAGES REQUIRED:  apache (N series) and openssl (N series)
+#
+#Include /etc/apache/mod_ssl.conf
+
+#NameVirtualHost VSERVER_IP
+
+Include /etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6cddef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/php.ini
@@ -0,0 +1,1122 @@
+[PHP]
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; About this file ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; This is the recommended, PHP 4-style version of the php.ini-dist file.  It
+; sets some non standard settings, that make PHP more efficient, more secure,
+; and encourage cleaner coding.
+; The price is that with these settings, PHP may be incompatible with some
+; applications, and sometimes, more difficult to develop with.  Using this
+; file is warmly recommended for production sites.  As all of the changes from
+; the standard settings are thoroughly documented, you can go over each one,
+; and decide whether you want to use it or not.
+;
+; For general information about the php.ini file, please consult the php.ini-dist
+; file, included in your PHP distribution.
+;
+; This file is different from the php.ini-dist file in the fact that it features
+; different values for several directives, in order to improve performance, while
+; possibly breaking compatibility with the standard out-of-the-box behavior of
+; PHP 3.  Please make sure you read what's different, and modify your scripts
+; accordingly, if you decide to use this file instead.
+;
+; - register_globals = Off         [Security, Performance]
+;     Global variables are no longer registered for input data (POST, GET, cookies,
+;     environment and other server variables).  Instead of using $foo, you must use
+;     you can use $_REQUEST["foo"] (includes any variable that arrives through the
+;     request, namely, POST, GET and cookie variables), or use one of the specific
+;     $_GET["foo"], $_POST["foo"], $_COOKIE["foo"] or $_FILES["foo"], depending
+;     on where the input originates.  Also, you can look at the
+;     import_request_variables() function.
+;     Note that register_globals is going to be depracated (i.e., turned off by
+;     default) in the next version of PHP, because it often leads to security bugs.
+;     Read http://php.net/manual/en/security.registerglobals.php for further
+;     information.
+; - display_errors = Off           [Security]
+;     With this directive set to off, errors that occur during the execution of
+;     scripts will no longer be displayed as a part of the script output, and thus,
+;     will no longer be exposed to remote users.  With some errors, the error message
+;     content may expose information about your script, web server, or database
+;     server that may be exploitable for hacking.  Production sites should have this
+;     directive set to off.
+; - log_errors = On                [Security]
+;     This directive complements the above one.  Any errors that occur during the
+;     execution of your script will be logged (typically, to your server's error log,
+;     but can be configured in several ways).  Along with setting display_errors to off,
+;     this setup gives you the ability to fully understand what may have gone wrong,
+;     without exposing any sensitive information to remote users.
+; - output_buffering = 4096        [Performance]
+;     Set a 4KB output buffer.  Enabling output buffering typically results in less
+;     writes, and sometimes less packets sent on the wire, which can often lead to
+;     better performance.  The gain this directive actually yields greatly depends
+;     on which Web server you're working with, and what kind of scripts you're using.
+; - register_argc_argv = Off       [Performance]
+;     Disables registration of the somewhat redundant $argv and $argc global
+;     variables.
+; - magic_quotes_gpc = Off         [Performance]
+;     Input data is no longer escaped with slashes so that it can be sent into
+;     SQL databases without further manipulation.  Instead, you should use the
+;     function addslashes() on each input element you wish to send to a database.
+; - variables_order = "GPCS"       [Performance]
+;     The environment variables are not hashed into the $HTTP_ENV_VARS[].  To access
+;     environment variables, you can use getenv() instead.
+; - error_reporting = E_ALL        [Code Cleanliness, Security(?)]
+;     By default, PHP surpresses errors of type E_NOTICE.  These error messages
+;     are emitted for non-critical errors, but that could be a symptom of a bigger
+;     problem.  Most notably, this will cause error messages about the use
+;     of uninitialized variables to be displayed.
+; - allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off     [Code cleanliness]
+;     It's not possible to decide to force a variable to be passed by reference
+;     when calling a function.  The PHP 4 style to do this is by making the
+;     function require the relevant argument by reference.
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Language Options ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Enable the PHP scripting language engine under Apache.
+engine = On
+
+; Allow the <? tag.  Otherwise, only <?php and <script> tags are recognized.  
+; NOTE: Using short tags should be avoided when developing applications or
+; libraries that are meant for redistribution, or deployment on PHP
+; servers which are not under your control, because short tags may not
+; be supported on the target server. For portable, redistributable code,
+; be sure not to use short tags.
+short_open_tag = On
+
+; Allow ASP-style <% %> tags.
+asp_tags = Off
+
+; The number of significant digits displayed in floating point numbers.
+precision    =  14
+
+; Enforce year 2000 compliance (will cause problems with non-compliant browsers)
+y2k_compliance = On
+
+; Output buffering allows you to send header lines (including cookies) even
+; after you send body content, at the price of slowing PHP's output layer a
+; bit.  You can enable output buffering during runtime by calling the output
+; buffering functions.  You can also enable output buffering for all files by
+; setting this directive to On.  If you wish to limit the size of the buffer
+; to a certain size - you can use a maximum number of bytes instead of 'On', as
+; a value for this directive (e.g., output_buffering=4096).
+output_buffering = 4096
+
+; You can redirect all of the output of your scripts to a function.  For
+; example, if you set output_handler to "mb_output_handler", character
+; encoding will be transparently converted to the specified encoding.
+; Setting any output handler automatically turns on output buffering.
+; Note: People who wrote portable scripts should not depend on this ini
+;       directive. Instead, explicitly set the output handler using ob_start().
+;       Using this ini directive may cause problems unless you know what script 
+;       is doing.
+; Note: You cannot use both "mb_output_handler" with "ob_iconv_handler"
+;       and you cannot use both "ob_gzhandler" and "zlib.output_compression". 
+;output_handler =
+
+; Transparent output compression using the zlib library
+; Valid values for this option are 'off', 'on', or a specific buffer size
+; to be used for compression (default is 4KB)
+; Note: Resulting chunk size may vary due to nature of compression. PHP 
+;       outputs chunks that are few handreds bytes each as a result of compression. 
+;       If you want larger chunk size for better performence, enable output_buffering 
+;       also. 
+; Note: output_handler must be empty if this is set 'On' !!!!
+;       Instead you must use zlib.output_handler.
+zlib.output_compression = Off
+
+; You cannot specify additional output handlers if zlib.output_compression
+; is activated here. This setting does the same as output_handler but in
+; a different order.
+;zlib.output_handler =
+
+; Implicit flush tells PHP to tell the output layer to flush itself
+; automatically after every output block.  This is equivalent to calling the
+; PHP function flush() after each and every call to print() or echo() and each
+; and every HTML block.  Turning this option on has serious performance
+; implications and is generally recommended for debugging purposes only.
+implicit_flush = Off
+
+; The unserialize callback function will be called (with the undefined class'
+; name as parameter), if the unserializer finds an undefined class
+; which should be instanciated.
+; A warning appears if the specified function is not defined, or if the
+; function doesn't include/implement the missing class.
+; So only set this entry, if you really want to implement such a 
+; callback-function.
+unserialize_callback_func=
+
+; When floats & doubles are serialized store serialize_precision significant
+; digits after the floating point. The default value ensures that when floats
+; are decoded with unserialize, the data will remain the same.
+serialize_precision = 100
+
+; Whether to enable the ability to force arguments to be passed by reference
+; at function call time.  This method is deprecated and is likely to be
+; unsupported in future versions of PHP/Zend.  The encouraged method of
+; specifying which arguments should be passed by reference is in the function
+; declaration.  You're encouraged to try and turn this option Off and make
+; sure your scripts work properly with it in order to ensure they will work
+; with future versions of the language (you will receive a warning each time
+; you use this feature, and the argument will be passed by value instead of by
+; reference).
+allow_call_time_pass_reference = Off
+
+;
+; Safe Mode
+;
+safe_mode = Off
+
+; By default, Safe Mode does a UID compare check when
+; opening files. If you want to relax this to a GID compare,
+; then turn on safe_mode_gid.
+safe_mode_gid = Off
+
+; When safe_mode is on, UID/GID checks are bypassed when
+; including files from this directory and its subdirectories.
+; (directory must also be in include_path or full path must
+; be used when including)
+safe_mode_include_dir =								
+
+; When safe_mode is on, only executables located in the safe_mode_exec_dir
+; will be allowed to be executed via the exec family of functions.
+safe_mode_exec_dir =
+
+; Setting certain environment variables may be a potential security breach.
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of prefixes.  In Safe Mode,
+; the user may only alter environment variables whose names begin with the
+; prefixes supplied here.  By default, users will only be able to set
+; environment variables that begin with PHP_ (e.g. PHP_FOO=BAR).
+;
+; Note:  If this directive is empty, PHP will let the user modify ANY
+; environment variable!
+safe_mode_allowed_env_vars = PHP_
+
+; This directive contains a comma-delimited list of environment variables that
+; the end user won't be able to change using putenv().  These variables will be
+; protected even if safe_mode_allowed_env_vars is set to allow to change them.
+safe_mode_protected_env_vars = LD_LIBRARY_PATH
+
+; open_basedir, if set, limits all file operations to the defined directory
+; and below.  This directive makes most sense if used in a per-directory
+; or per-virtualhost web server configuration file. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+;open_basedir =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain functions for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of function names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_functions =
+
+; This directive allows you to disable certain classes for security reasons.
+; It receives a comma-delimited list of class names. This directive is
+; *NOT* affected by whether Safe Mode is turned On or Off.
+disable_classes =
+
+; Colors for Syntax Highlighting mode.  Anything that's acceptable in
+; <font color="??????"> would work.
+;highlight.string  = #DD0000
+;highlight.comment = #FF9900
+;highlight.keyword = #007700
+;highlight.bg      = #FFFFFF
+;highlight.default = #0000BB
+;highlight.html    = #000000
+
+
+;
+; Misc
+;
+; Decides whether PHP may expose the fact that it is installed on the server
+; (e.g. by adding its signature to the Web server header).  It is no security
+; threat in any way, but it makes it possible to determine whether you use PHP
+; on your server or not.
+expose_php = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Resource Limits ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+max_execution_time = 30     ; Maximum execution time of each script, in seconds
+max_input_time = 60	; Maximum amount of time each script may spend parsing request data
+memory_limit = 8M      ; Maximum amount of memory a script may consume (8MB)
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Error handling and logging ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; error_reporting is a bit-field.  Or each number up to get desired error
+; reporting level
+; E_ALL             - All errors and warnings
+; E_ERROR           - fatal run-time errors
+; E_WARNING         - run-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_PARSE           - compile-time parse errors
+; E_NOTICE          - run-time notices (these are warnings which often result
+;                     from a bug in your code, but it's possible that it was
+;                     intentional (e.g., using an uninitialized variable and
+;                     relying on the fact it's automatically initialized to an
+;                     empty string)
+; E_CORE_ERROR      - fatal errors that occur during PHP's initial startup
+; E_CORE_WARNING    - warnings (non-fatal errors) that occur during PHP's
+;                     initial startup
+; E_COMPILE_ERROR   - fatal compile-time errors
+; E_COMPILE_WARNING - compile-time warnings (non-fatal errors)
+; E_USER_ERROR      - user-generated error message
+; E_USER_WARNING    - user-generated warning message
+; E_USER_NOTICE     - user-generated notice message
+;
+; Examples:
+;
+;   - Show all errors, except for notices
+;
+;error_reporting = E_ALL & ~E_NOTICE
+;
+;   - Show only errors
+;
+;error_reporting = E_COMPILE_ERROR|E_ERROR|E_CORE_ERROR
+;
+;   - Show all errors
+;
+error_reporting  =  E_ALL
+
+; Print out errors (as a part of the output).  For production web sites,
+; you're strongly encouraged to turn this feature off, and use error logging
+; instead (see below).  Keeping display_errors enabled on a production web site
+; may reveal security information to end users, such as file paths on your Web
+; server, your database schema or other information.
+display_errors = Off
+
+; Even when display_errors is on, errors that occur during PHP's startup
+; sequence are not displayed.  It's strongly recommended to keep
+; display_startup_errors off, except for when debugging.
+display_startup_errors = Off
+
+; Log errors into a log file (server-specific log, stderr, or error_log (below))
+; As stated above, you're strongly advised to use error logging in place of
+; error displaying on production web sites.
+log_errors = On
+
+; Set maximum length of log_errors. In error_log information about the source is
+; added. The default is 1024 and 0 allows to not apply any maximum length at all.
+log_errors_max_len = 1024
+
+; Do not log repeated messages. Repeated errors must occur in same file on same
+; line until ignore_repeated_source is set true.
+ignore_repeated_errors = Off
+
+; Ignore source of message when ignoring repeated messages. When this setting 
+; is On you will not log errors with repeated messages from different files or
+; sourcelines.
+ignore_repeated_source = Off
+
+; If this parameter is set to Off, then memory leaks will not be shown (on
+; stdout or in the log). This has only effect in a debug compile, and if 
+; error reporting includes E_WARNING in the allowed list
+report_memleaks = On
+
+; Store the last error/warning message in $php_errormsg (boolean).
+track_errors = Off
+
+; Disable the inclusion of HTML tags in error messages.
+;html_errors = Off
+
+; If html_errors is set On PHP produces clickable error messages that direct 
+; to a page describing the error or function causing the error in detail.
+; You can download a copy of the PHP manual from http://www.php.net/docs.php 
+; and change docref_root to the base URL of your local copy including the
+; leading '/'. You must also specify the file extension being used including 
+; the dot.
+;docref_root = "/phpmanual/"
+;docref_ext = .html
+  
+; String to output before an error message.
+;error_prepend_string = "<font color=ff0000>"
+
+; String to output after an error message.
+;error_append_string = "</font>"
+
+; Log errors to specified file.
+;error_log = filename
+
+; Log errors to syslog (Event Log on NT, not valid in Windows 95).
+;error_log = syslog
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Data Handling ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; Note - track_vars is ALWAYS enabled as of PHP 4.0.3
+
+; The separator used in PHP generated URLs to separate arguments.
+; Default is "&". 
+;arg_separator.output = "&amp;"
+
+; List of separator(s) used by PHP to parse input URLs into variables.
+; Default is "&". 
+; NOTE: Every character in this directive is considered as separator!
+;arg_separator.input = ";&"
+
+; This directive describes the order in which PHP registers GET, POST, Cookie,
+; Environment and Built-in variables (G, P, C, E & S respectively, often
+; referred to as EGPCS or GPC).  Registration is done from left to right, newer
+; values override older values.
+variables_order = "GPCS"
+
+; Whether or not to register the EGPCS variables as global variables.  You may
+; want to turn this off if you don't want to clutter your scripts' global scope
+; with user data.  This makes most sense when coupled with track_vars - in which
+; case you can access all of the GPC variables through the $HTTP_*_VARS[],
+; variables.
+;
+; You should do your best to write your scripts so that they do not require
+; register_globals to be on;  Using form variables as globals can easily lead
+; to possible security problems, if the code is not very well thought of.
+register_globals = Off
+
+; This directive tells PHP whether to declare the argv&argc variables (that
+; would contain the GET information).  If you don't use these variables, you
+; should turn it off for increased performance.
+register_argc_argv = Off
+
+; Maximum size of POST data that PHP will accept.
+post_max_size = 8M
+
+; This directive is deprecated.  Use variables_order instead.
+gpc_order = "GPC"
+
+; Magic quotes
+;
+
+; Magic quotes for incoming GET/POST/Cookie data.
+magic_quotes_gpc = Off
+
+; Magic quotes for runtime-generated data, e.g. data from SQL, from exec(), etc.
+magic_quotes_runtime = Off    
+
+; Use Sybase-style magic quotes (escape ' with '' instead of \').
+magic_quotes_sybase = Off
+
+; Automatically add files before or after any PHP document.
+auto_prepend_file =
+auto_append_file =
+
+; As of 4.0b4, PHP always outputs a character encoding by default in
+; the Content-type: header.  To disable sending of the charset, simply
+; set it to be empty.
+;
+; PHP's built-in default is text/html
+default_mimetype = "text/html"
+;default_charset = "iso-8859-1"
+
+; Always populate the $HTTP_RAW_POST_DATA variable.                               
+;always_populate_raw_post_data = On
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Paths and Directories ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; UNIX: "/path1:/path2"  
+;include_path = ".:/php/includes"
+;
+; Windows: "\path1;\path2"
+;include_path = ".;c:\php\includes"
+
+; The root of the PHP pages, used only if nonempty.
+; if PHP was not compiled with FORCE_REDIRECT, you SHOULD set doc_root
+; if you are running php as a CGI under any web server (other than IIS)
+; see documentation for security issues.  The alternate is to use the
+; cgi.force_redirect configuration below
+doc_root =
+
+; The directory under which PHP opens the script using /~usernamem used only
+; if nonempty.
+user_dir =
+
+; Directory in which the loadable extensions (modules) reside.
+; extension_dir = "./"
+extension_dir = "/usr/lib/php/extensions/"
+
+; Whether or not to enable the dl() function.  The dl() function does NOT work
+; properly in multithreaded servers, such as IIS or Zeus, and is automatically
+; disabled on them.
+enable_dl = On
+
+; cgi.force_redirect is necessary to provide security running PHP as a CGI under
+; most web servers.  Left undefined, PHP turns this on by default.  You can
+; turn it off here AT YOUR OWN RISK
+; **You CAN safely turn this off for IIS, in fact, you MUST.**
+; cgi.force_redirect = 1
+
+; if cgi.nph is enabled it will force cgi to always sent Status: 200 with
+; every request.
+; cgi.nph = 1
+
+; if cgi.force_redirect is turned on, and you are not running under Apache or Netscape 
+; (iPlanet) web servers, you MAY need to set an environment variable name that PHP
+; will look for to know it is OK to continue execution.  Setting this variable MAY
+; cause security issues, KNOW WHAT YOU ARE DOING FIRST.
+; cgi.redirect_status_env = ;
+
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo provides *real* PATH_INFO/PATH_TRANSLATED support for CGI.  PHP's
+; previous behaviour was to set PATH_TRANSLATED to SCRIPT_FILENAME, and to not grok
+; what PATH_INFO is.  For more information on PATH_INFO, see the cgi specs.  Setting
+; this to 1 will cause PHP CGI to fix it's paths to conform to the spec.  A setting
+; of zero causes PHP to behave as before.  Default is zero.  You should fix your scripts
+; to use SCRIPT_FILENAME rather than PATH_TRANSLATED.
+; cgi.fix_pathinfo=1
+
+; FastCGI under IIS (on WINNT based OS) supports the ability to impersonate
+; security tokens of the calling client.  This allows IIS to define the
+; security context that the request runs under.  mod_fastcgi under Apache
+; does not currently support this feature (03/17/2002)
+; Set to 1 if running under IIS.  Default is zero.
+; fastcgi.impersonate = 1;
+
+; Disable logging through FastCGI connection
+; fastcgi.log = 0
+
+; cgi.rfc2616_headers configuration option tells PHP what type of headers to
+; use when sending HTTP response code. If it's set 0 PHP sends Status: header that
+; is supported by Apache. When this option is set to 1 PHP will send
+; RFC2616 compliant header.
+; Default is zero.
+;cgi.rfc2616_headers = 0 
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; File Uploads ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow HTTP file uploads.
+file_uploads = On
+
+; Temporary directory for HTTP uploaded files (will use system default if not
+; specified).
+;upload_tmp_dir =
+
+; Maximum allowed size for uploaded files.
+upload_max_filesize = 10M
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Fopen wrappers ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+; Whether to allow the treatment of URLs (like http:// or ftp://) as files.
+allow_url_fopen = On
+
+; Define the anonymous ftp password (your email address)
+;from="john@doe.com"
+
+; Define the user agent for php to send
+;user_agent="PHP"
+
+; Default timeout for socket based streams (seconds)
+default_socket_timeout = 60
+
+; If your scripts have to deal with files from Macintosh systems,
+; or you are running on a Mac and need to deal with files from
+; unix or win32 systems, setting this flag will cause PHP to
+; automatically detect the EOL character in those files so that
+; fgets() and file() will work regardless of the source of the file.
+; auto_detect_line_endings = Off
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Dynamic Extensions ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+;
+; If you wish to have an extension loaded automatically, use the following
+; syntax:
+;
+;   extension=modulename.extension
+;
+; For example, on Windows:
+;
+;   extension=msql.dll
+;
+; ... or under UNIX:
+;
+;   extension=msql.so
+;
+; Note that it should be the name of the module only; no directory information 
+; needs to go here.  Specify the location of the extension with the
+; extension_dir directive above.
+;
+; Load the MySQL module by default.  Comment this out if you don't use MySQL.
+extension=mysql.so
+
+; Load the gettext extension by default.  Comment this out if you don't have the
+; gettext shared library installed.
+extension=gettext.so
+
+;Windows Extensions
+;Note that MySQL and ODBC support is now built in, so no dll is needed for it.
+;
+;extension=php_mbstring.dll
+;extension=php_bz2.dll
+;extension=php_cpdf.dll
+;extension=php_crack.dll
+;extension=php_curl.dll
+;extension=php_db.dll
+;extension=php_dba.dll
+;extension=php_dbase.dll
+;extension=php_dbx.dll
+;extension=php_domxml.dll
+;extension=php_exif.dll
+;extension=php_fdf.dll
+;extension=php_filepro.dll
+;extension=php_gd2.dll
+;extension=php_gettext.dll
+;extension=php_hyperwave.dll
+;extension=php_iconv.dll
+;extension=php_ifx.dll
+;extension=php_iisfunc.dll
+;extension=php_imap.dll
+;extension=php_interbase.dll
+;extension=php_java.dll
+;extension=php_ldap.dll
+;extension=php_mcrypt.dll
+;extension=php_mhash.dll
+;extension=php_mime_magic.dll
+;extension=php_ming.dll
+;extension=php_mssql.dll
+;extension=php_msql.dll
+;extension=php_oci8.dll
+;extension=php_openssl.dll
+;extension=php_oracle.dll
+;extension=php_pdf.dll
+;extension=php_pgsql.dll
+;extension=php_printer.dll
+;extension=php_shmop.dll
+;extension=php_snmp.dll
+;extension=php_sockets.dll
+;extension=php_sybase_ct.dll
+;extension=php_w32api.dll
+;extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
+;extension=php_xslt.dll
+;extension=php_yaz.dll
+;extension=php_zip.dll
+
+
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+; Module Settings ;
+;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
+
+[Syslog]
+; Whether or not to define the various syslog variables (e.g. $LOG_PID,
+; $LOG_CRON, etc.).  Turning it off is a good idea performance-wise.  In
+; runtime, you can define these variables by calling define_syslog_variables().
+define_syslog_variables  = Off
+
+[mail function]
+; For Win32 only.
+SMTP = localhost
+smtp_port = 25
+
+; For Win32 only.
+;sendmail_from = me@example.com
+
+; For Unix only.  You may supply arguments as well (default: "sendmail -t -i").
+;sendmail_path =
+
+[Java]
+;java.class.path = .\php_java.jar
+;java.home = c:\jdk
+;java.library = c:\jdk\jre\bin\hotspot\jvm.dll 
+;java.library.path = .\
+
+[SQL]
+sql.safe_mode = Off
+
+[ODBC]
+;odbc.default_db    =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_user  =  Not yet implemented
+;odbc.default_pw    =  Not yet implemented
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+odbc.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Check that a connection is still valid before reuse.
+odbc.check_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+odbc.max_links = -1  
+
+; Handling of LONG fields.  Returns number of bytes to variables.  0 means
+; passthru.
+odbc.defaultlrl = 4096  
+
+; Handling of binary data.  0 means passthru, 1 return as is, 2 convert to char.
+; See the documentation on odbc_binmode and odbc_longreadlen for an explanation
+; of uodbc.defaultlrl and uodbc.defaultbinmode
+odbc.defaultbinmode = 1  
+
+[MySQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mysql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mysql.max_links = -1
+
+; Default port number for mysql_connect().  If unset, mysql_connect() will use
+; the $MYSQL_TCP_PORT or the mysql-tcp entry in /etc/services or the
+; compile-time value defined MYSQL_PORT (in that order).  Win32 will only look
+; at MYSQL_PORT.
+mysql.default_port =
+
+; Default socket name for local MySQL connects.  If empty, uses the built-in
+; MySQL defaults.
+mysql.default_socket =
+
+; Default host for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_host =
+
+; Default user for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+mysql.default_user =
+
+; Default password for mysql_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+; Note that this is generally a *bad* idea to store passwords in this file.
+; *Any* user with PHP access can run 'echo get_cfg_var("mysql.default_password")
+; and reveal this password!  And of course, any users with read access to this
+; file will be able to reveal the password as well.
+mysql.default_password =
+
+; Maximum time (in seconds) for connect timeout. -1 means no limit
+mysql.connect_timeout = 60
+
+; Trace mode. When trace_mode is active (=On), warnings for table/index scans and
+; SQL-Errors will be displayed.
+mysql.trace_mode = Off
+
+[mSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+msql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+msql.max_links = -1
+
+[PostgresSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+pgsql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Detect broken persistent links always with pg_pconnect(). 
+; Auto reset feature requires a little overheads.
+pgsql.auto_reset_persistent = Off
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+pgsql.max_links = -1
+
+; Ignore PostgreSQL backends Notice message or not.
+; Notice message logging require a little overheads.
+pgsql.ignore_notice = 0
+
+; Log PostgreSQL backends Noitce message or not.
+; Unless pgsql.ignore_notice=0, module cannot log notice message.
+pgsql.log_notice = 0
+
+[Sybase]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybase.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybase.max_links = -1
+
+;sybase.interface_file = "/usr/sybase/interfaces"
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+sybase.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+sybase.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+; If on, this will cause PHP to automatically assign types to results according
+; to their Sybase type, instead of treating them all as strings.  This
+; compatibility mode will probably not stay around forever, so try applying
+; whatever necessary changes to your code, and turn it off.
+sybase.compatability_mode = Off
+
+[Sybase-CT]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+sybct.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+sybct.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum server message severity to display.
+sybct.min_server_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum client message severity to display.
+sybct.min_client_severity = 10
+
+[dbx]
+; returned column names can be converted for compatibility reasons
+; possible values for dbx.colnames_case are
+; "unchanged" (default, if not set)
+; "lowercase"
+; "uppercase"
+; the recommended default is either upper- or lowercase, but
+; unchanged is currently set for backwards compatibility
+dbx.colnames_case = "lowercase"
+
+[bcmath]
+; Number of decimal digits for all bcmath functions.
+bcmath.scale = 0
+
+[browscap]
+;browscap = extra/browscap.ini
+
+[Informix]
+; Default host for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_host =
+
+; Default user for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_user =
+
+; Default password for ifx_connect() (doesn't apply in safe mode).
+ifx.default_password =
+
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ifx.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent + non-persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+ifx.max_links = -1
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a text blob instead of its id.
+ifx.textasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, select statements return the contents of a byte blob instead of its id.
+ifx.byteasvarchar = 0
+
+; Trailing blanks are stripped from fixed-length char columns.  May help the
+; life of Informix SE users.
+ifx.charasvarchar = 0
+
+; If on, the contents of text and byte blobs are dumped to a file instead of
+; keeping them in memory.
+ifx.blobinfile = 0
+
+; NULL's are returned as empty strings, unless this is set to 1.  In that case,
+; NULL's are returned as string 'NULL'.
+ifx.nullformat = 0
+
+[Session]
+; Handler used to store/retrieve data.
+session.save_handler = files
+
+; Argument passed to save_handler.  In the case of files, this is the path
+; where data files are stored. Note: Windows users have to change this 
+; variable in order to use PHP's session functions.
+;session.save_path = /tmp
+
+; Whether to use cookies.
+session.use_cookies = 1
+
+; This option enables administrators to make their users invulnerable to 
+; attacks which involve passing session ids in URLs; defaults to 0.
+; session.use_only_cookies = 1
+
+; Name of the session (used as cookie name).
+session.name = PHPSESSID
+
+; Initialize session on request startup.
+session.auto_start = 0
+
+; Lifetime in seconds of cookie or, if 0, until browser is restarted.
+session.cookie_lifetime = 0
+
+; The path for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_path = /
+
+; The domain for which the cookie is valid.
+session.cookie_domain =
+
+; Handler used to serialize data.  php is the standard serializer of PHP.
+session.serialize_handler = php
+
+; Define the probability that the 'garbage collection' process is started
+; on every session initialization.
+; The probability is calculated by using gc_probability/gc_divisor,
+; e.g. 1/100 means there is a 1% chance that the GC process starts
+; on each request.
+
+session.gc_probability = 1
+session.gc_divisor     = 1000
+
+; After this number of seconds, stored data will be seen as 'garbage' and
+; cleaned up by the garbage collection process.
+session.gc_maxlifetime = 1440
+
+; PHP 4.2 and less have an undocumented feature/bug that allows you to
+; to initialize a session variable in the global scope, albeit register_globals
+; is disabled.  PHP 4.3 and later will warn you, if this feature is used.
+; You can disable the feature and the warning separately. At this time,
+; the warning is only displayed, if bug_compat_42 is enabled.
+
+session.bug_compat_42 = 0
+session.bug_compat_warn = 1
+
+; Check HTTP Referer to invalidate externally stored URLs containing ids.
+; HTTP_REFERER has to contain this substring for the session to be
+; considered as valid.
+session.referer_check =
+
+; How many bytes to read from the file.
+session.entropy_length = 0
+
+; Specified here to create the session id.
+session.entropy_file =
+
+;session.entropy_length = 16
+
+;session.entropy_file = /dev/urandom
+
+; Set to {nocache,private,public,} to determine HTTP caching aspects.
+; or leave this empty to avoid sending anti-caching headers.
+session.cache_limiter = nocache
+
+; Document expires after n minutes.
+session.cache_expire = 180
+
+; trans sid support is disabled by default.
+; Use of trans sid may risk your users security.
+; Use this option with caution.
+; - User may send URL contains active session ID
+;   to other person via. email/irc/etc.
+; - URL that contains active session ID may be stored
+;   in publically accessible computer. 
+; - User may access your site with the same session ID
+;   always using URL stored in browser's history or bookmarks.
+session.use_trans_sid = 0
+
+; The URL rewriter will look for URLs in a defined set of HTML tags.
+; form/fieldset are special; if you include them here, the rewriter will
+; add a hidden <input> field with the info which is otherwise appended
+; to URLs.  If you want XHTML conformity, remove the form entry.
+; Note that all valid entries require a "=", even if no value follows.
+url_rewriter.tags = "a=href,area=href,frame=src,input=src,form=fakeentry"
+
+[MSSQL]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+mssql.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links (persistent+non persistent).  -1 means no limit.
+mssql.max_links = -1
+
+; Minimum error severity to display.
+mssql.min_error_severity = 10
+
+; Minimum message severity to display.
+mssql.min_message_severity = 10
+
+; Compatability mode with old versions of PHP 3.0.
+mssql.compatability_mode = Off
+
+; Connect timeout
+;mssql.connect_timeout = 5
+
+; Query timeout
+;mssql.timeout = 60
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textlimit = 4096
+
+; Valid range 0 - 2147483647.  Default = 4096.
+;mssql.textsize = 4096
+
+; Limits the number of records in each batch.  0 = all records in one batch.
+;mssql.batchsize = 0
+
+; Specify how datetime and datetim4 columns are returned
+; On => Returns data converted to SQL server settings
+; Off => Returns values as YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss
+;mssql.datetimeconvert = On
+
+; Use NT authentication when connecting to the server
+mssql.secure_connection = Off
+
+; Specify max number of processes. Default = 25
+;mssql.max_procs = 25
+
+[Assertion]
+; Assert(expr); active by default.
+;assert.active = On
+
+; Issue a PHP warning for each failed assertion.
+;assert.warning = On
+
+; Don't bail out by default.
+;assert.bail = Off
+
+; User-function to be called if an assertion fails.
+;assert.callback = 0
+
+; Eval the expression with current error_reporting().  Set to true if you want
+; error_reporting(0) around the eval().
+;assert.quiet_eval = 0
+
+[Ingres II]
+; Allow or prevent persistent links.
+ingres.allow_persistent = On
+
+; Maximum number of persistent links.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_persistent = -1
+
+; Maximum number of links, including persistents.  -1 means no limit.
+ingres.max_links = -1
+
+; Default database (format: [node_id::]dbname[/srv_class]).
+ingres.default_database =
+
+; Default user.
+ingres.default_user =
+
+; Default password.
+ingres.default_password =
+
+[Verisign Payflow Pro]
+; Default Payflow Pro server.
+pfpro.defaulthost = "test-payflow.verisign.com"
+
+; Default port to connect to.
+pfpro.defaultport = 443
+
+; Default timeout in seconds.
+pfpro.defaulttimeout = 30
+
+; Default proxy IP address (if required).
+;pfpro.proxyaddress =
+
+; Default proxy port.
+;pfpro.proxyport =
+
+; Default proxy logon.
+;pfpro.proxylogon =
+
+; Default proxy password.
+;pfpro.proxypassword =
+
+[com]
+; path to a file containing GUIDs, IIDs or filenames of files with TypeLibs
+;com.typelib_file = 
+; allow Distributed-COM calls
+;com.allow_dcom = true
+; autoregister constants of a components typlib on com_load()
+;com.autoregister_typelib = true
+; register constants casesensitive
+;com.autoregister_casesensitive = false
+; show warnings on duplicate constat registrations
+;com.autoregister_verbose = true
+
+[Printer]
+;printer.default_printer = ""
+
+[mbstring]
+; language for internal character representation.
+;mbstring.language = Japanese
+
+; internal/script encoding.
+; Some encoding cannot work as internal encoding.
+; (e.g. SJIS, BIG5, ISO-2022-*)
+;mbstring.internal_encoding = EUC-JP
+
+; http input encoding.
+;mbstring.http_input = auto
+
+; http output encoding. mb_output_handler must be
+; registered as output buffer to function
+;mbstring.http_output = SJIS
+
+; enable automatic encoding translation accoding to 
+; mbstring.internal_encoding setting. Input chars are
+; converted to internal encoding by setting this to On.
+; Note: Do _not_ use automatic encoding translation for
+;       portable libs/applications.
+;mbstring.encoding_translation = Off
+
+; automatic encoding detection order.
+; auto means 
+;mbstring.detect_order = auto
+
+; substitute_character used when character cannot be converted
+; one from another
+;mbstring.substitute_character = none;
+
+; overload(replace) single byte functions by mbstring functions.
+; mail(), ereg(), etc are overloaded by mb_send_mail(), mb_ereg(),
+; etc. Possible values are 0,1,2,4 or combination of them.
+; For example, 7 for overload everything.
+; 0: No overload
+; 1: Overload mail() function
+; 2: Overload str*() functions
+; 4: Overload ereg*() functions
+;mbstring.func_overload = 0
+
+[FrontBase]
+;fbsql.allow_persistent = On
+;fbsql.autocommit = On
+;fbsql.default_database = 
+;fbsql.default_database_password =
+;fbsql.default_host =
+;fbsql.default_password =
+;fbsql.default_user = "_SYSTEM"
+;fbsql.generate_warnings = Off
+;fbsql.max_connections = 128
+;fbsql.max_links = 128
+;fbsql.max_persistent = -1
+;fbsql.max_results = 128
+;fbsql.batchSize = 1000
+
+[Crack]
+; Modify the setting below to match the directory location of the cracklib
+; dictionary files.  Include the base filename, but not the file extension.
+; crack.default_dictionary = "c:\php\lib\cracklib_dict"
+
+[exif]
+; Exif UNICODE user comments are handled as UCS-2BE/UCS-2LE and JIS as JIS. 
+; With mbstring support this will automatically be converted into the encoding
+; given by corresponding encode setting. When empty mbstring.internal_encoding 
+; is used. For the decode settings you can distinguish between motorola and 
+; intel byte order. A decode setting cannot be empty.
+;exif.encode_unicode = ISO-8859-15
+;exif.decode_unicode_motorola = UCS-2BE
+;exif.decode_unicode_intel    = UCS-2LE
+;exif.encode_jis = 
+;exif.decode_jis_motorola = JIS
+;exif.decode_jis_intel    = JIS
+
+; Local Variables:
+; tab-width: 4
+; End:
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e69de29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/apache/vhosts
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/hosts b/templates/vserver.d/etc/hosts
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6e33147
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/hosts
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#
+# hosts		This file describes a number of hostname-to-address
+#		mappings for the TCP/IP subsystem.  It is mostly
+#		used at boot time, when no name servers are running.
+#		On small systems, this file can be used instead of a
+#		"named" name server.  Just add the names, addresses
+#		and any aliases to this file...
+#
+# By the way, Arnt Gulbrandsen <agulbra@nvg.unit.no> says that 127.0.0.1
+# should NEVER be named with the name of the machine.  It causes problems
+# for some (stupid) programs, irc and reputedly talk. :^)
+#
+
+# For loopbacking.
+127.0.0.1	localhost
+# This next entry is technically wrong, but good enough to get TCP/IP apps
+# to quit complaining that they can't verify the hostname on a loopback-only
+# Linux box.
+127.0.0.1	darkstar.example.net darkstar
+
+# End of hosts.
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache b/templates/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f31fbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/logrotate.d/apache
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+/var/log/apache/access_log /var/log/apache/error_log {
+    monthly
+    nomail
+    compress
+    create 0664 root root
+    rotate 12
+    postrotate
+      /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd restart > /dev/null
+    endscript
+}
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/profile b/templates/vserver.d/etc/profile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..563594a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/profile
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+# /etc/profile: This file contains system-wide defaults used by
+# all Bourne (and related) shells.
+
+# Set the values for some environment variables:
+export MINICOM="-c on"
+export MANPATH=/usr/local/man:/usr/man:/usr/X11R6/man
+export HOSTNAME="`cat /etc/HOSTNAME`"
+export LESSOPEN="|lesspipe.sh %s"
+export LESS="-M"
+
+# If the user doesn't have a .inputrc, use the one in /etc.
+if [ ! -r "$HOME/.inputrc" ]; then
+  export INPUTRC=/etc/inputrc
+fi
+
+# Set the default system $PATH:
+PATH="/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin:/usr/games"
+
+# For root users, ensure that /usr/local/sbin, /usr/sbin, and /sbin are in
+# the $PATH.  Some means of connection don't add these by default (sshd comes
+# to mind).
+if [ "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+  echo $PATH | grep /usr/local/sbin 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+  if [ ! $? = 0 ]; then
+    PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:$PATH
+  fi
+fi
+
+# I had problems using 'eval tset' instead of 'TERM=', but you might want to 
+# try it anyway. I think with the right /etc/termcap it would work great.
+# eval `tset -sQ "$TERM"`
+if [ "$TERM" = "" -o "$TERM" = "unknown" ]; then
+ TERM=linux
+fi
+
+# Set ksh93 visual editing mode:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+  VISUAL=emacs
+#  VISUAL=gmacs
+#  VISUAL=vi
+fi
+
+# Set a default shell prompt:
+#PS1='`hostname`:`pwd`# '
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/pdksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! $ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ksh" ]; then
+ PS1='! ${PWD/#$HOME/~}$ '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ PS1='%n@%m:%~%# '
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ PS1='$ '
+else
+ PS1='\u@\h:\w\$ '
+fi
+PS2='> '
+export PATH DISPLAY LESS TERM PS1 PS2
+
+# Default umask.  A umask of 022 prevents new files from being created group
+# and world writable.
+umask 022
+
+# Set up the LS_COLORS and LS_OPTIONS environment variables for color ls:
+if [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/zsh" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -z`
+elif [ "$SHELL" = "/bin/ash" ]; then
+ eval `dircolors -s`
+else
+ eval `dircolors -b`
+fi
+
+# Append any additional sh scripts found in /etc/profile.d/:
+for profile_script in /etc/profile.d/*.sh ; do
+  if [ -x $profile_script ]; then
+    . $profile_script
+  fi
+done
+unset profile_script
+
+# For non-root users, add the current directory to the search path:
+if [ ! "`id -u`" = "0" ]; then
+ PATH="$PATH:."
+fi
+
+# firewall:
+export FTP_PASSIVE=1
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..eefbcc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+if [ "$1" == "3" ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.M
+elif [ "$1" == "6" ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.6
+else
+  echo "Invalid level."
+  exit 1
+fi
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0 b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.0
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4 b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b972052
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.4
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links:  /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes:  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6 b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..bfec90a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.6
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.6		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		0 (halt) or runlevel 6 (reboot). It kills all processes,
+#		unmounts file systems and then either halts or reboots.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.6	2.47 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/etc:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Set linefeed mode to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr
+
+echo "Running shutdown script $0:"
+
+# Find out how we were called.
+case "$0" in
+	*0)
+		command="halt"
+		;;
+	*6)
+		command=reboot
+		;;
+	*)
+		echo "$0: call me as \"rc.0\" or \"rc.6\" please!"
+		exit 1
+		;;
+esac
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the MySQL database:
+if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Try to kill dhcpcd so the DHCP leases can be returned:
+killall -15 dhcpcd 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null
+
+# Try to shut down pppd:
+PS="$(ps ax)"
+if echo "$PS" | grep -q -w pppd ; then
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/ppp-off ]; then
+    /usr/sbin/ppp-off
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Turn off process accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off process accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+# INIT is supposed to handle this entirely now, but this didn't always
+# work correctly without this second pass at killing off the processes.
+# Since INIT already notified the user that processes were being killed,
+# we'll avoid echoing this info this time around.
+if [ "$1" != "fast" ]; then # shutdown did not already kill all processes
+  killall5 -15 
+  sleep 5
+  killall5 -9
+fi
+
+# Carry a random seed between reboots.
+echo "Saving random seed from /dev/urandom in /etc/random-seed."
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
+# Before unmounting file systems write a reboot or halt record to wtmp.
+$command -w
+
+# Clear /var/lock/subsys.
+if [ -d /var/lock/subsys ]; then
+  rm -f /var/lock/subsys/*
+fi
+
+# This never hurts:
+sync
+
+# sleep 1 fixes problems with some hard drives that don't
+# otherwise finish syncing before reboot or poweroff
+sleep 1
+
+# This is to ensure all processes have completed on SMP machines:
+wait
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..00a1501
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.K
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+#! /bin/sh
+#
+# rc.K 		This file is executed by init when it goes into runlevel
+#		1, which is the administrative state. It kills all
+#		daemons and then puts the system into single user mode.
+#		Note that the file systems are kept mounted.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.K	3.1415 Sat Jan 13 13:37:26 PST 2001
+#
+# Author:	Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@drinkel.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified by:  Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Set the path.
+PATH=/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/sbin
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off quota:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaoff ]; then
+    echo "Turning off filesystem quotas."
+    /sbin/quotaoff -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Try to turn off accounting:
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  echo "Turning off accounting."
+  /sbin/accton
+fi
+
+# Stop the Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd stop
+fi
+
+# Stop the Samba server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd stop
+fi
+
+# Shut down PCMCIA devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia stop
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  sleep 5
+fi
+
+# Kill all processes.
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGHUP signal."
+killall5 -1
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to hang up"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGTERM signal."
+killall5 -15
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to terminate"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+echo "Sending all processes the SIGKILL signal."
+killall5 -9
+echo -n "Waiting for processes to exit"
+for loop in 0 1 2 3 4 5 ; do
+  sleep 1
+  echo -n "."
+done
+echo
+
+# Now go to the single user level
+echo "Going to single user mode..."
+telinit -t 1 1
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..0cb3343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.M
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.M		This file is executed by init(8) when the system is being
+#		initialized for one of the "multi user" run levels (i.e.
+#		levels 1 through 6).  It usually does mounting of file
+#		systems et al.
+#
+# Version:	@(#)/etc/rc.d/rc.M	2.23	Wed Feb 26 19:20:58 PST 2003
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+#		Heavily modified by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+# Tell the viewers what's going to happen.
+echo "Going multiuser..."
+
+# Screen blanks after 15 minutes idle time, and powers down in one hour
+# if the kernel supports APM or ACPI power management:
+#/bin/setterm -blank 15 -powersave powerdown -powerdown 60
+
+# Set the hostname.
+#if [ -r /etc/HOSTNAME ]; then
+#  /bin/hostname $(cat /etc/HOSTNAME | cut -f1 -d .)
+#else
+  # fall back on this old default:
+#  echo "darkstar.example.net" > /etc/HOSTNAME
+#  /bin/hostname darkstar
+#fi
+
+# Save the contents of 'dmesg':
+#/bin/dmesg -s 65536 > /var/log/dmesg
+
+# Start the system logger.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -d /var/log ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# Initialize PCMCIA devices:
+#
+# NOTE: This used to be started near the top of rc.S so that PCMCIA devices
+# could be fsck'ed along with the other drives.  This had some unfortunate
+# side effects, however, since root isn't yet read-write, and /var might not
+# even be mounted the .pid files can't be correctly written in /var/run and
+# the pcmcia system can't be correctly shut down.  If you want some PCMCIA
+# partition to be mounted at boot (or when the card is inserted) then add
+# the appropriate lines to /etc/pcmcia/scsi.opts.
+#
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia ] ; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.pcmcia start
+  # The cards might need a little extra time here to initialize.
+  if [ -r /var/run/cardmgr.pid ]; then
+    sleep 5
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize the networking hardware.  If your network driver is a module
+# and you haven't loaded it manually, this will be deferred until after
+# the hotplug system loads the module below.
+#if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1 ]; then
+#  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet1
+#fi
+
+# Initialize the hotplugging subsystem for Cardbus, IEEE1394, PCI, and USB devices:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  # Don't run hotplug if 'nohotplug' was given at boot.
+  if ! grep nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Activating hardware detection:  /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start"
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug start
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start networking daemons:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
+fi
+
+# Remove stale locks and junk files (must be done after mount -a!)
+/bin/rm -f /var/lock/* /var/spool/uucp/LCK..* /tmp/.X*lock /tmp/core /core 2> /dev/null
+
+# Remove stale hunt sockets so the game can start.
+if [ -r /tmp/hunt -o -r /tmp/hunt.stats ]; then
+  echo "Removing your stale hunt sockets from /tmp."
+  /bin/rm -f /tmp/hunt*
+fi
+
+# Ensure basic filesystem permissions sanity.
+chmod 755 / 2> /dev/null
+chmod 1777 /tmp /var/tmp
+
+# Update all the shared library links:
+if [ -x /sbin/ldconfig ]; then
+  echo "Updating shared library links: /sbin/ldconfig"
+  /sbin/ldconfig
+fi
+
+# Update the X font indexes:
+if [ -x /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache ]; then
+  echo "Updating X font indexes: /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache"
+  /usr/X11R6/bin/fc-cache
+fi
+
+# Start the print spooling system.  This will usually be LPRng (lpd) or CUPS.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.cups ]; then
+  # Start CUPS:
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.cups start
+elif [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng ]; then
+  # Start LPRng (lpd):
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.lprng start
+fi
+
+# Start netatalk. (a file/print server for Macs using Appletalk)
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.atalk
+fi
+
+# Start smartd, which monitors the status of S.M.A.R.T. compatible
+# hard drives and reports any problems.  Note some devices (which aren't
+# smart, I guess ;) will hang if probed by smartd, so it's commented out
+# by default.
+#if [ -x /usr/sbin/smartd ]; then
+#  /usr/sbin/smartd
+#fi
+
+# Monitor the UPS with genpowerd.
+# To use this, uncomment this section and edit your settings in
+# /etc/genpowerd.conf (serial device, UPS type, etc).  For more information,
+# see "man genpowerd" or the extensive documentation in the
+# /usr/doc/genpower-1.0.3 directory.
+# You'll also need to configure a similar block in /etc/rc.d/rc.6 if you want
+# support for stopping the UPS's inverter after the machine halts.
+#if [ -x /sbin/genpowerd ]; then
+#  echo "Starting genpowerd daemon..."
+#  /sbin/genpowerd
+#fi
+
+# Turn on process accounting.  To enable process accounting, make sure the
+# option for BSD process accounting is enabled in your kernel, and then
+# create the file /var/log/pacct (touch /var/log/pacct).  By default, process
+# accounting is not enabled (since /var/log/pacct does not exist).  This is
+# because the log file can get VERY large.
+if [ -x /sbin/accton -a -r /var/log/pacct ]; then
+  /sbin/accton /var/log/pacct
+  chmod 640 /var/log/pacct
+  echo "Process accounting turned on."
+fi
+
+# Start crond (Dillon's crond):
+# If you want cron to actually log activity to /var/log/cron, then change
+# -l10 to -l8 to increase the logging level.
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/crond ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/crond -l10 >>/var/log/cron 2>&1
+fi
+
+# Start atd (manages jobs scheduled with 'at'):
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/atd ]; then
+  /usr/sbin/atd -b 15 -l 1
+fi
+
+# Slackware-Mini-Quota-HOWTO:
+# To really activate quotas, you'll need to add 'usrquota' and/or 'grpquota' to
+# the appropriate partitions as listed in /etc/fstab.  Here's an example:
+#
+# /dev/hda2      /home      ext3     defaults,usrquota      1   1
+#
+# You'll then need to setup initial quota files at the top of the partitions
+# to support quota, like this:
+# touch /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+# chmod 600 /home/aquota.user /home/aquota.group
+#
+# Then, reboot to activate the system.
+# To edit user quotas, use 'edquota'.  See 'man edquota'.  Also, the
+# official Quota Mini-HOWTO has lots of useful information.  That can be found
+# here:  /usr/doc/Linux-HOWTOs/Quota
+
+# Check quotas and then turn quota system on:
+if grep -q quota /etc/fstab ; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotacheck ]; then
+    echo "Checking filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotacheck -avugm"
+    /sbin/quotacheck -avugm
+  fi
+  if [ -x /sbin/quotaon ]; then
+    echo "Activating filesystem quotas:  /sbin/quotaon -avug"
+    /sbin/quotaon -avug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the sendmail daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail start
+fi
+
+# Start the APM daemon if APM is enabled in the kernel:
+if [ -x /usr/sbin/apmd ]; then
+  if cat /proc/apm 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Starting APM daemon:  /usr/sbin/apmd"
+    /usr/sbin/apmd
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start the ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.acpid start
+fi
+
+# Load ALSA (sound) defaults:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.alsa
+fi
+
+# Load a custom screen font if the user has an rc.font script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.font ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.font
+fi
+
+# Load a custom keymap if the user has an rc.keymap script.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.keymap
+fi
+
+# Initialize HP Officejet support:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.hpoj start
+fi
+
+# Start the MySQL database:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld start
+fi
+
+# Start Apache web server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd start
+fi
+
+# Start Samba (a file/print server for Win95/NT machines).
+# Samba can be started in /etc/inetd.conf instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.samba ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.samba start
+fi
+
+# Start the GPM mouse server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.gpm start
+fi
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Start the local setup procedure.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.local ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.local
+fi
+
+# All done.
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..05c75b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.S
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.S:  System initialization script.
+#
+# Mostly written by:  Patrick J. Volkerding, <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+#
+
+PATH=/sbin:/usr/sbin:/bin:/usr/bin
+
+# Mount /proc right away:
+/sbin/mount -v proc /proc -n -t proc
+
+# If 'nohotplug' was given at boot, or rc.hotplug has been turned off
+# (is not executable), then shut off hotplugging in the kernel now.
+# Turning off hotplug is *not* recommended, and will break some things.
+if [ -w /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug ]; then
+  if grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  elif [ ! -x /etc/rc.d/rc.hotplug ]; then
+    echo "/dev/null" > /proc/sys/kernel/hotplug
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Start devfsd if necessary.  On newer kernels, udev should be used instead.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.devfsd start
+fi
+
+# Mount sysfs next, if the kernel supports it:
+if [ -d /sys ]; then
+  if cat /proc/filesystems | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    if ! cat /proc/mounts | grep -w sysfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+      /sbin/mount -v sysfs /sys -n -t sysfs
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Initialize udev to manage /dev entries for 2.6.x kernels:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.udev ]; then
+  if ! grep -w nohotplug /proc/cmdline 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    /etc/rc.d/rc.udev
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Enable swapping:
+/sbin/swapon -a
+
+# Test to see if the root partition is read-only, like it ought to be.
+READWRITE=no
+if touch /fsrwtestfile 2>/dev/null; then
+  rm -f /fsrwtestfile
+  READWRITE=yes
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-only filesystem"
+fi
+
+# See if a forced filesystem check was requested at shutdown:
+if [ -r /etc/forcefsck ]; then
+  FORCEFSCK="-f"
+fi
+
+# Check the root filesystem:
+if [ ! $READWRITE = yes ]; then
+  RETVAL=0
+  if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+    echo "Checking root filesystem:"
+    /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -a /
+    RETVAL=$?
+  fi
+  # An error code of 2 or higher will require a reboot.
+  if [ $RETVAL -ge 2 ]; then
+    # An error code equal to or greater than 4 means that some errors
+    # could not be corrected.  This requires manual attention, so we
+    # offer a chance to try to fix the problem in single-user mode:
+    if [ $RETVAL -ge 4 ]; then
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo "*** An error occurred during the root filesystem check. ***"
+      echo "*** You will now be given a chance to log into the      ***"
+      echo "*** system in single-user mode to fix the problem.      ***"
+      echo "***                                                     ***"
+      echo "*** If you are using the ext2 filesystem, running       ***"
+      echo "*** 'e2fsck -v -y <partition>' might help.              ***"
+      echo "***********************************************************"
+      echo
+      echo "Once you exit the single-user shell, the system will reboot."
+      echo
+      PS1="(Repair filesystem) \#"; export PS1
+      sulogin
+    else # With an error code of 2 or 3, reboot the machine automatically:
+      echo
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo "*** The filesystem was changed. ***"
+      echo "*** The system will now reboot. ***"
+      echo "***********************************"
+      echo
+    fi
+    echo "Unmounting file systems."
+    /sbin/umount -a -r
+    /sbin/mount -n -o remount,ro /
+    echo "Rebooting system."
+    sleep 2
+    reboot -f
+  fi
+  # Remount the root filesystem in read-write mode
+  echo "Remounting root device with read-write enabled."
+  /sbin/mount -w -v -n -o remount /
+  if [ $? -gt 0 ] ; then
+    echo
+    echo "Attempt to remount root device as read-write failed!  This is going to"
+    echo "cause serious problems."
+    echo 
+    echo "If you're using the UMSDOS filesystem, you **MUST** mount the root partition"
+    echo "read-write!  You can make sure the root filesystem is getting mounted "
+    echo "read-write with the 'rw' flag to Loadlin:"
+    echo
+    echo "loadlin vmlinuz root=/dev/hda1 rw   (replace /dev/hda1 with your root device)"
+    echo
+    echo "Normal bootdisks can be made to mount a system read-write with the rdev command:"
+    echo
+    echo "rdev -R /dev/fd0 0"
+    echo
+    echo "You can also get into your system by using a boot disk with a command like this"
+    echo "on the LILO prompt line:  (change the root partition name as needed)"
+    echo 
+    echo "LILO: mount root=/dev/hda1 rw"
+    echo
+    echo "Please press ENTER to continue, then reboot and use one of the above methods to"
+    echo -n "get into your machine and start looking for the problem. " 
+    read junk; 
+  fi
+else
+  echo "Testing root filesystem status:  read-write filesystem"
+  if cat /etc/fstab | grep ' / ' | grep umsdos 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    ROOTTYPE="umsdos"
+  fi
+  if [ ! "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # no warn for UMSDOS
+    echo
+    echo "*** ERROR: Root partition has already been mounted read-write. Cannot check!"
+    echo
+    echo "For filesystem checking to work properly, your system must initially mount"
+    echo "the root partition as read only. Please modify your kernel with 'rdev' so that"
+    echo "it does this. If you're booting with LILO, add a line:"
+    echo
+    echo "   read-only"
+    echo
+    echo "to the Linux section in your /etc/lilo.conf and type 'lilo' to reinstall it."
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a kernel on a floppy disk, put it in the drive and type:"
+    echo "   rdev -R /dev/fd0 1"
+    echo
+    echo "If you boot from a bootdisk, or with Loadlin, you can add the 'ro' flag."
+    echo
+    echo "This will fix the problem *AND* eliminate this annoying message. :^)"
+    echo
+    echo -n "Press ENTER to continue. "
+    read junk;
+  fi
+fi # Done checking root filesystem
+
+# Any /etc/mtab that exists here is old, so we delete it to start over:
+/bin/rm -f /etc/mtab*
+# Remounting the / partition will initialize the new /etc/mtab:
+/sbin/mount -w -o remount /
+
+# Fix /etc/mtab to list sys and proc if they were not yet entered in
+# /etc/mtab because / was still mounted read-only:
+if [ -d /proc/sys ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f proc /proc -t proc
+fi
+if [ -d /sys/bus ]; then
+  /sbin/mount -f sysfs /sys -t sysfs
+fi
+
+# Set the system time from the hardware clock using hwclock --hctosys.
+if [ -x /sbin/hwclock ]; then
+  if grep "^UTC" /etc/hardwareclock 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (UTC)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --utc --hctosys
+  else
+    echo "Setting system time from the hardware clock (localtime)."
+    /sbin/hwclock --localtime --hctosys
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Configure ISA Plug-and-Play devices:
+if [ -r /etc/isapnp.conf ]; then
+  if [ -x /sbin/isapnp ]; then
+    /sbin/isapnp /etc/isapnp.conf
+  fi
+fi
+
+# This loads any kernel modules that are needed.  These might be required to
+# use your ethernet card, sound card, or other optional hardware.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.modules -a -r /proc/modules ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.modules
+fi
+
+# Configure runtime kernel parameters:
+if [ -x /sbin/sysctl -a -r /etc/sysctl.conf ]; then
+  /sbin/sysctl -e -p /etc/sysctl.conf
+fi
+
+# Initialize the Logical Volume Manager.
+# This won't start unless we find /etc/lvmtab (LVM1) or 
+# /etc/lvm/backup/ (LVM2).  This is created by /sbin/vgscan, so to
+# use LVM you must run /sbin/vgscan yourself the first time (and
+# create some VGs and LVs).
+if [ -r /etc/lvmtab -o -d /etc/lvm/backup ]; then
+  echo "Initializing LVM (Logical Volume Manager):"
+  # Check for device-mapper support.
+  if ! cat /proc/devices | grep -w device-mapper 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+    # If device-mapper exists as a module, try to load it.
+    if [ -r /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko ]; then
+      insmod /lib/modules/$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/osrelease)/kernel/drivers/md/dm-mod.ko
+    fi
+  fi
+  # Scan for new volume groups:
+  /sbin/vgscan 2> /dev/null
+  if [ $? = 0 ]; then
+    # This needs a moment to register.
+    sleep 10
+    # Make volume groups available to the kernel.
+    # This should also make logical volumes available.
+    /sbin/vgchange -ay
+    # Enable swapping again in case any LVs are used for swap.  Ignore previous error.  :-)
+    /sbin/swapon -a
+  fi
+fi
+
+# Check all the non-root filesystems:
+if [ ! -r /etc/fastboot ]; then
+  echo "Checking non-root filesystems:"
+  /sbin/fsck $FORCEFSCK -C -R -A -a
+fi
+
+# mount non-root file systems in fstab (but not NFS or SMB 
+# because TCP/IP is not yet configured, and not proc because
+# that has already been mounted):
+/sbin/mount -a -v -t nonfs,nosmbfs,noproc
+
+# Clean up some temporary files:
+( cd /var/log/setup/tmp && rm -rf * )
+/bin/rm -f /var/run/utmp /var/run/*pid /etc/nologin /var/run/lpd* \
+  /var/run/ppp* /etc/dhcpc/*.pid /etc/forcefsck /etc/fastboot
+
+# Attempt to umount and remove any leftover /initrd:
+if [ -d /initrd ]; then
+  /sbin/umount /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  rmdir /initrd 2> /dev/null
+  blockdev --flushbufs /dev/ram0 2> /dev/null
+fi
+
+# Create a fresh utmp file:
+touch /var/run/utmp
+chown root.utmp /var/run/utmp
+chmod 664 /var/run/utmp
+
+if [ "$ROOTTYPE" = "umsdos" ]; then # we need to update any files added in DOS:
+  echo "Synchronizing UMSDOS directory structure:"
+  echo "  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /"
+  /sbin/umssync -r99 -v- /
+fi
+
+# Setup the /etc/motd to reflect the current kernel level:
+# THIS WIPES ANY CHANGES YOU MAKE TO /ETC/MOTD WITH EACH BOOT.
+# COMMENT THIS OUT IF YOU WANT TO MAKE A CUSTOM VERSION.
+echo "$(/bin/uname -sr)." > /etc/motd
+
+# If there are SystemV init scripts for this runlevel, run them.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
+fi
+
+# Run serial port setup script:
+# (CAREFUL! This can make some systems hang if the rc.serial script isn't
+# set up correctly. If this happens, you may have to edit the file from a
+# boot disk)
+#
+# . /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
+
+# Carry an entropy pool between reboots to improve randomness.
+if [ -f /etc/random-seed ]; then
+  echo "Using /etc/random-seed to initialize /dev/urandom."
+  cat /etc/random-seed > /dev/urandom
+fi
+# Use the pool size from /proc, or 512 bytes:
+if [ -r /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize ]; then
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=$(cat /proc/sys/kernel/random/poolsize) 2> /dev/null
+else
+  dd if=/dev/urandom of=/etc/random-seed count=1 bs=512 2> /dev/null
+fi
+chmod 600 /etc/random-seed
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..00b8837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+# Start/stop/restart the Apache web server.
+#
+# To make Apache start automatically at boot, make this
+# file executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.httpd
+#
+
+case "$1" in
+   'start')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl start ;;
+   'stop')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl stop ;;
+   'restart')
+      /usr/sbin/apachectl restart ;;
+   *)
+      echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart" ;;
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2 b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..db56589
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inet2
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.inet2	This shell script boots up the entire network system.
+#		Note, that when this script is used to also fire
+#		up any important remote NFS disks (like the /usr
+#		directory), care must be taken to actually
+#		have all the needed binaries online _now_ ...
+#
+#               Uncomment or comment out sections depending on which
+#               services your site requires.
+#
+# Author:	Fred N. van Kempen, <waltje@uwalt.nl.mugnet.org>
+# Modified for Slackware by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>
+
+
+# At this point, we are ready to talk to The World...
+
+
+# Mount remote (NFS) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w nfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  # Start the RPC portmapper if we find NFS volumes defined in /etc/fstab,
+  # since it will need to be running in order to mount them.  If portmap
+  # is not running, attempting to mount an NFS partition will cause mount
+  # to hang.  Keep this in mind if you plan to mount unlisted partitions...
+  if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+    . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+  else
+    # Warn about a possible NFS problem.  It's also possible to mount NFS partitions
+    # without rpc.portmap by using '-o nolock' (not a good idea in most cases).
+    echo "WARNING:  NFS partitions found in /etc/fstab, but /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is"
+    echo "          not executable.  If you do not run portmap, NFS partitions will"
+    echo "          not mount properly.  To start rpc.portmap at boot, change the"
+    echo "          permissions on /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap"
+    sleep 10
+  fi
+  echo "Mounting remote (NFS) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t nfs      	 # This may be our /usr runtime!
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t nfs
+fi
+
+# Load the RPC portmapper if /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# This might be needed to mount NFS partitions that are not listed in /etc/fstab.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap start
+fi
+
+# Mount remote (SMB) filesystems:
+if cat /etc/fstab | grep -v '^#' | grep -w smbfs 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+  echo "Mounting remote (SMB) file systems:  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs"
+  /sbin/mount -a -t smbfs
+  # Show the mounted volumes:
+  /sbin/mount -v -t smbfs
+fi
+
+# Start the system logger if it is not already running (maybe because /usr
+# is on a network partition).
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog -a -d /var/log -a ! -r /var/run/syslogd.pid ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.syslog start
+fi
+
+# If there is a firewall script, run it before enabling packet forwarding.
+# See the HOWTOs on http://www.netfilter.org/ for documentation on
+# setting up a firewall or NAT on Linux.  In some cases this might need to
+# be moved past the section below dealing with IP packet forwarding.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.firewall start
+fi
+
+# Turn on IPv4 packet forwarding support.
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward start
+fi
+
+# Start the inetd server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.inetd start
+fi
+
+# Start the OpenSSH SSH daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd ]; then
+  echo "Starting OpenSSH SSH daemon: /usr/sbin/sshd"
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.sshd start
+fi
+
+# Start the BIND name server daemon:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.bind ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.bind start
+fi
+
+# Start NIS (the Network Information Service):
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.yp ]; then
+  . /etc/rc.d/rc.yp start
+fi
+
+# Start the NFS server.   Note that for this to work correctly, you'll
+# need to load the knfsd module for kernel NFS server support.
+# You'll also need to set up some shares in /etc/exports, and be sure
+# that /etc/rc.d/rc.portmap is executable.
+# Starting the NFS server:
+if [ -x /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd ]; then
+  /etc/rc.d/rc.nfsd start
+fi
+
+# Stuff you won't need follows.  ;-)
+
+# # Start the network routing daemon:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/routed ]; then
+#   echo "Starting network routing daemon:  /usr/sbin/routed"
+#   /usr/sbin/routed -g -s
+# fi
+
+# # Start the system status server:
+# if [ -x /usr/sbin/rwhod ]; then
+#   echo "Starting system status server:  /usr/sbin/rwhod"
+#   /usr/sbin/rwhod
+# fi
+
+#  # Fire up the PC-NFS daemon(s).  This is a primarily obsolete system, and may
+#  # not be very secure.  It's not at all needed for normal NFS server support.
+#  # You probably should not run this.
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd ]; then
+#    echo "Starting PC-NFS daemons:  /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd"
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.pcnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+#  if [ -x /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd ]; then
+#    /usr/sbin/rpc.bwnfsd /var/spool/lpd
+#  fi
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9fe1419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.inetd
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart inetd, the BSD Internet super-daemon.
+
+# Start inetd:
+inetd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/inetd ]; then
+    echo "Starting Internet super-server daemon:  /usr/sbin/inetd"
+    /usr/sbin/inetd
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop inetd:
+inetd_stop() {
+  killall inetd
+}
+
+# Restart inetd:
+inetd_restart() {
+  inetd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  inetd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  inetd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  inetd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  inetd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52bd2fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward:  start/stop IP packet forwarding
+#
+# If you intend to run your Linux box as a router, i.e. as a
+# computer that forwards and redistributes network packets, you
+# will need to enable IP packet forwarding in your kernel.
+#
+# To activate IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script executable:  chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+#
+# To disable IP packet forwarding at boot time, make this
+# script non-executable:  chmod 644 /etc/rc.d/rc.ip_forward
+
+# Start IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_start() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Activating IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+  # When using IPv4 packet forwarding, you will also get the
+  # rp_filter, which automatically rejects incoming packets if the
+  # routing table entry for their source address doesn't match the
+  # network interface they're arriving on.  This has security
+  # advantages because it prevents the so-called IP spoofing,
+  # however it can pose problems if you use asymmetric routing
+  # (packets from you to a host take a different path than packets
+  # from that host to you) or if you operate a non-routing host
+  # which has several IP addresses on different interfaces.  To
+  # turn rp_filter off, uncomment the lines below:
+  #if [ -r /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter ]; then
+  #  echo "Disabling rp_filter."
+  #  echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter
+  #fi
+}
+
+# Stop IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_stop() {
+  if [ -f /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward ]; then
+    echo "Disabling IPv4 packet forwarding."
+    echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart IP packet forwarding:
+ip_forward_restart() {
+  ip_forward_stop
+  sleep 1
+  ip_forward_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  ip_forward_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  ip_forward_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  ip_forward_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..3cf2076
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.local
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# /etc/rc.d/rc.local:  Local system initialization script.
+#
+# Put any local setup commands in here:
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..239e2e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart mysqld.
+#
+# Copyright 2003 Patrick J. Volkerding, Concord, CA
+# Copyright 2003 Slackware Linux, Inc., Concord, CA
+#
+# This program comes with NO WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law.
+# You may redistribute copies of this program under the terms of the
+# GNU General Public License.
+
+# To start MySQL automatically at boot, be sure this script is executable:
+# chmod 755 /etc/rc.d/rc.mysqld
+
+# Before you can run MySQL, you must have a database.  To install an initial
+# database, do this as root:
+#
+#   su - mysql
+#   mysql_install_db
+#
+# Note that step one is becoming the mysql user.  It's important to do this
+# before making any changes to the database, or mysqld won't be able to write
+# to it later (this can be fixed with 'chown -R mysql.mysql /var/lib/mysql').
+
+# To disallow outside connections to the database (if you don't need them, this
+# is recommended to increase security), uncomment the next line:
+#SKIP="--skip-networking"
+
+# Start mysqld:
+mysqld_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/bin/mysqld_safe ]; then
+    # If there is an old PID file (no mysqld running), clean it up:
+    if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+      if ! ps ax | grep mysqld 1> /dev/null 2> /dev/null ; then
+        echo "Cleaning up old /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid."
+        rm -f /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid
+      fi
+    fi
+    /usr/bin/mysqld_safe --datadir=/var/lib/mysql --pid-file=/var/run/mysql/mysql.pid $SKIP &
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop mysqld:
+mysqld_stop() {
+  # If there is no PID file, ignore this request...
+  if [ -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+    killall mysqld
+    # Wait at least one minute for it to exit, as we don't know how big the DB is...
+    for second in 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \
+      0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 ; do
+      if [ ! -r /var/run/mysql/mysql.pid ]; then
+        break;
+      fi
+      sleep 1
+    done
+    if [ "$second" = "60" ]; then
+      echo "WARNING:  Gave up waiting for mysqld to exit!"
+      sleep 15
+    fi
+  fi
+}
+
+# Restart mysqld:
+mysqld_restart() {
+  mysqld_stop
+  mysqld_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  mysqld_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  mysqld_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  mysqld_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc32367
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.postfix
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+## Slackware init script for postfix
+##   20030828 Manolis Tzanidakis
+#
+
+postfix_start() {
+        if [ -x /usr/sbin/postfix ]; then
+                echo -n "Starting postfix MTA:  "
+                echo "/usr/sbin/postfix start"
+                /usr/sbin/postfix start 2>/dev/null
+        fi
+}
+
+postfix_stop() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix stop 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+postfix_restart() {
+        sh $0 stop
+	sleep 1
+        sh $0 start
+}
+
+postfix_reload() {
+        /usr/sbin/postfix reload 2>/dev/null
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+        'start')
+                postfix_start
+                ;;
+        'stop')
+                postfix_stop
+                ;;
+        'restart')
+                postfix_restart
+                ;;
+        'reload')
+                postfix_reload
+                ;;
+        *)
+                echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart|reload"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a31c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sendmail
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart sendmail.
+
+# Start sendmail:
+sendmail_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/sendmail ]; then
+    echo "Starting sendmail MTA daemon: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-mta -bd -q25m
+    echo "Starting sendmail MSP queue runner: /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m"
+    /usr/sbin/sendmail -L sm-msp-queue -Ac -q25m
+  fi
+}
+
+# Stop sendmail:
+sendmail_stop() {
+  killall sendmail
+}
+
+# Restart sendmail:
+sendmail_restart() {
+  sendmail_stop
+  sleep 1
+  sendmail_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sendmail_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sendmail_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sendmail_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5f31c01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.serial
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+#
+# /etc/rc.serial 
+#	Initializes the serial ports on your system
+#
+# chkconfig: 2345 50 75
+# description: This initializes the settings of the serial port
+#
+# FILE_VERSION: 19981128
+#
+# Distributed with setserial and the serial driver.  We need to use the
+# FILE_VERSION field to assure that we don't overwrite a newer rc.serial 
+# file with a newer one.
+# 
+# XXXX For now, the autosave feature doesn't work if you are
+# using the multiport feature; it doesn't save the multiport configuration
+# (for now).  Autosave also doesn't work for the hayes devices.  
+#
+
+RCLOCKFILE=/var/lock/subsys/serial
+DIRS="/lib/modules/`uname -r`/misc /lib/modules /usr/lib/modules ."
+PATH=/bin:/sbin:/usr/bin
+DRIVER=serial
+DRIVER_NAME=serial
+MODULE_REGEXP="serial\b"
+
+ALLDEVS="/dev/ttyS?"
+if /bin/ls /dev/ttyS?? >& /dev/null ; then
+	ALLDEVS="$ALLDEVS /dev/ttyS??"
+fi
+
+SETSERIAL=""
+if test -x /bin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/bin/setserial
+elif test -x /sbin/setserial ; then
+	SETSERIAL=/sbin/setserial
+fi
+
+#
+# See if the serial driver is loaded
+#
+LOADED=""
+if test -f /proc/devices; then
+	if grep -q " ttyS$" /proc/devices ; then
+		LOADED="yes"
+	else
+		LOADED="no"
+	fi
+fi
+
+#
+# Find the serial driver
+#
+for i in $DIRS
+do
+	if test -z "$MODULE" -a -f $i/$DRIVER.o ; then
+		MODULE=$i/$DRIVER.o
+	fi
+done
+
+if ! test -f /proc/modules ; then
+	MODULE=""
+fi
+
+#
+# Handle System V init conventions...
+#
+case $1 in
+start)
+	action="start";
+	;;
+stop)
+	action="stop";
+	;;
+*)
+	action="start";
+esac
+
+if test $action  = stop ; then
+	if test -n ${SETSERIAL} -a "$LOADED" != "no" -a \
+           `head -1 /etc/serial.conf`X = "###AUTOSAVE###X" ; then
+		echo -n "Saving state of serial devices... "
+		grep "^#" /etc/serial.conf > /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		${SETSERIAL} -G -g ${ALLDEVS} >> /etc/.serial.conf.new
+		mv /etc/serial.conf /etc/.serial.conf.old
+		mv /etc/.serial.conf.new /etc/serial.conf
+		echo "done."
+	fi
+	if test -n "$MODULE" ; then
+		module=`grep $MODULE_REGEXP /proc/modules | awk '{print $1}'`
+		if test -z "$module" ; then 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver is not loaded."
+			rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+			exit 0
+		fi
+		if rmmod $module ; then :; else 
+			echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver could NOT be unloaded."
+			exit 1;
+		fi
+		echo "The $DRIVER_NAME driver has been unloaded."
+	fi
+	rm -f ${RCLOCKFILE}
+	exit 0
+fi
+
+#
+# If not stop, it must be a start....
+#
+
+if test -n "$MODULE" -a "$LOADED" != "yes" ; then 
+	if insmod -f $MODULE $DRIVER_ARG ; then
+          true
+	else
+		echo "Couldn't load $DRIVER_NAME driver."
+		exit 1
+	fi
+fi
+
+if test -f /etc/serial.conf ; then
+        if test -n ${SETSERIAL} ; then
+		grep -v ^# < /etc/serial.conf | while read device args
+		do
+                    if [ ! "$device" = "" -a ! "$args" = "" ]; then
+                        ${SETSERIAL} -z $device $args
+                    fi
+		done 
+	fi
+else
+	echo "###AUTOSAVE###" > /etc/serial.conf
+fi
+
+touch ${RCLOCKFILE}
+${SETSERIAL} -bg ${ALLDEVS}
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a3707e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sshd
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the secure shell server:
+
+sshd_start() {
+  # Create host keys if needed.
+  if [ ! -r /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa1 -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key -N '' 
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t dsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  if [ ! -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key ]; then
+    /usr/bin/ssh-keygen -t rsa -f /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key -N ''
+  fi
+  /usr/sbin/sshd
+}
+
+sshd_stop() {
+  killall sshd
+}
+
+sshd_restart() {
+  if [ -r /var/run/sshd.pid ]; then
+    echo "WARNING: killing listener process only.  To kill every sshd process, you must"
+    echo "         use 'rc.sshd stop'.  'rc.sshd restart' kills only the parent sshd to"
+    echo "         allow an admin logged in through sshd to use 'rc.sshd restart' without"
+    echo "         being cut off.  If sshd has been upgraded, new connections will now"
+    echo "         use the new version, which should be a safe enough approach."
+    kill `cat /var/run/sshd.pid`
+  else
+    killall sshd
+  fi
+  sleep 1
+  sshd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  sshd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  sshd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  sshd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..a005fb7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.syslog
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Start/stop/restart the system logging daemons.
+#
+# Written for Slackware Linux by Patrick J. Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>.
+
+syslogd_start() {
+  if [ -x /usr/sbin/syslogd -a -x /usr/sbin/klogd ]; then
+    echo -n "Starting sysklogd daemons: "
+    echo -n "/usr/sbin/syslogd "
+    /usr/sbin/syslogd
+    sleep 1 # prevent syslogd/klogd race condition on SMP kernels
+    echo "/usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x"
+    # '-c 3' = display level 'error' or higher messages on console
+    # '-x' = turn off broken EIP translation
+    /usr/sbin/klogd -c 3 -x
+  fi
+}
+
+syslogd_stop() {
+  killall syslogd 2> /dev/null
+  killall klogd 2> /dev/null
+}
+
+syslogd_restart() {
+  syslogd_stop
+  sleep 1
+  syslogd_start
+}
+
+case "$1" in
+'start')
+  syslogd_start
+  ;;
+'stop')
+  syslogd_stop
+  ;;
+'restart')
+  syslogd_restart
+  ;;
+*)
+  echo "usage $0 start|stop|restart"
+esac
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..916e59e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rc.d/rc.sysvinit
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+#
+# rc.sysvinit   This file provides basic compatibility with SystemV style
+#               startup scripts.  The SystemV style init system places 
+#               start/stop scripts for each runlevel into directories such as
+#               /etc/rc.d/rc3.d/ (for runlevel 3) instead of starting them
+#               from /etc/rc.d/rc.M.  This makes for a lot more init scripts,
+#               and a more complicated execution path to follow through if
+#               something goes wrong.  For this reason, Slackware has always
+#               used the traditional BSD style init script layout.
+#
+#               However, many binary packages exist that install SystemV
+#               init scripts.  With rc.sysvinit in place, most well-written
+#               startup scripts will work.  This is primarily intended to
+#               support commercial software, though, and probably shouldn't
+#               be considered bug free.
+#
+#               Written by Patrick Volkerding <volkerdi@slackware.com>, 1999
+#               from an example by Miquel van Smoorenburg <miquels@cistron.nl>.
+
+# Run an init script:
+startup() {
+  case "$1" in
+  *.sh)
+    sh "$@"
+    ;;
+  *)
+    "$@"
+    ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+# Set onlcr to avoid staircase effect.
+stty onlcr 0>&1
+
+if [ "$runlevel" = "" ]; then
+  runlevel=$RUNLEVEL
+  export runlevel
+  prevlevel=$PREVLEVEL
+  export prevlevel
+fi
+
+# Run kill scripts in the previous runlevel if not "none"
+if [ ! "$prevlevel" = "N" ]; then
+  for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$prevlevel.d/K* ; do
+    if [ -x $script ]; then
+      startup $script stop
+    fi
+  done
+fi
+
+# Now do the startup scripts:
+for script in /etc/rc.d/rc$runlevel.d/S* ; do
+  if [ -x $script ]; then
+    startup $script start
+  fi
+done
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a74acc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/rssh.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# This is the default rssh config file
+
+# set the log facility.  "LOG_USER" and "user" are equivalent.
+logfacility = LOG_USER 
+
+# Leave these all commented out to make the default action for rssh to lock
+# users out completely...
+
+allowscp
+allowsftp
+#allowcvs
+#allowrdist
+#allowrsync
+
+# set the default umask
+umask = 022
+
+# If you want to chroot users, use this to set the directory where the root of
+# the chroot jail will be located.
+#
+# if you DO NOT want to chroot users, LEAVE THIS COMMENTED OUT.
+# You can quote anywhere, but quotes not required unless path contains a
+# space... as in this example.
+
+chrootpath = "/var/users"
+
+##########################################
+# EXAMPLES of configuring per-user options
+
+#user=rudy:077:00010:  # the path can simply be left out to not chroot
+#user=rudy:077:00010   # the ending colon is optional
+
+#spaces in the path must be quoted...
+#user=rudy:011:00001:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # scp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00010:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # sftp with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00011:"/usr/local/chroot dir"  # both with chroot
+#user=rudy:011:00100:  # cvs, with no chroot 
+#user=rudy:011:01000:  # rdist, with no chroot
+#user=rudy:011:10000:  # rsync, with no chroot
+#user="rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # whole user string can be quoted
+#user=rudy:01"1:00001:/usr/local/chroot"  # or somewhere in the middle, freak!
+#user=rudy:'011:00001:/usr/local/chroot'  # single quotes too
+
+# Spaces before or after the '=' are fine, but spaces in chrootpath need
+# quotes.
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  
+#user = "rudy:011:00001:/usr/local/chroot dir"  # neither do comments at line end
+
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config b/templates/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a161fec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/etc/ssh/sshd_config
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+#	$OpenBSD: sshd_config,v 1.69 2004/05/23 23:59:53 dtucker Exp $
+
+# This is the sshd server system-wide configuration file.  See
+# sshd_config(5) for more information.
+
+# This sshd was compiled with PATH=/usr/local/sbin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/bin:/bin
+
+# The strategy used for options in the default sshd_config shipped with
+# OpenSSH is to specify options with their default value where
+# possible, but leave them commented.  Uncommented options change a
+# default value.
+
+#Port 22
+#Protocol 2,1
+#ListenAddress 0.0.0.0
+#ListenAddress ::
+
+# HostKey for protocol version 1
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_key
+# HostKeys for protocol version 2
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_rsa_key
+#HostKey /etc/ssh/ssh_host_dsa_key
+
+# Lifetime and size of ephemeral version 1 server key
+#KeyRegenerationInterval 1h
+#ServerKeyBits 768
+
+# Logging
+#obsoletes QuietMode and FascistLogging
+#SyslogFacility AUTH
+#LogLevel INFO
+
+# Authentication:
+
+#LoginGraceTime 2m
+PermitRootLogin no
+#StrictModes yes
+#MaxAuthTries 6
+
+#RSAAuthentication yes
+#PubkeyAuthentication yes
+#AuthorizedKeysFile	.ssh/authorized_keys
+
+# For this to work you will also need host keys in /etc/ssh/ssh_known_hosts
+#RhostsRSAAuthentication no
+# similar for protocol version 2
+#HostbasedAuthentication no
+# Change to yes if you don't trust ~/.ssh/known_hosts for
+# RhostsRSAAuthentication and HostbasedAuthentication
+#IgnoreUserKnownHosts no
+# Don't read the user's ~/.rhosts and ~/.shosts files
+#IgnoreRhosts yes
+
+# To disable tunneled clear text passwords, change to no here!
+#PasswordAuthentication yes
+#PermitEmptyPasswords no
+
+# Change to no to disable s/key passwords
+#ChallengeResponseAuthentication yes
+
+# Kerberos options
+#KerberosAuthentication no
+#KerberosOrLocalPasswd yes
+#KerberosTicketCleanup yes
+#KerberosGetAFSToken no
+
+# GSSAPI options
+#GSSAPIAuthentication no
+#GSSAPICleanupCredentials yes
+
+# Set this to 'yes' to enable PAM authentication, account processing, 
+# and session processing. If this is enabled, PAM authentication will 
+# be allowed through the ChallengeResponseAuthentication mechanism. 
+# Depending on your PAM configuration, this may bypass the setting of 
+# PasswordAuthentication, PermitEmptyPasswords, and 
+# "PermitRootLogin without-password". If you just want the PAM account and 
+# session checks to run without PAM authentication, then enable this but set 
+# ChallengeResponseAuthentication=no
+#UsePAM no
+
+#AllowTcpForwarding yes
+#GatewayPorts no
+#X11Forwarding no
+#X11DisplayOffset 10
+#X11UseLocalhost yes
+#PrintMotd yes
+#PrintLastLog yes
+#TCPKeepAlive yes
+#UseLogin no
+#UsePrivilegeSeparation yes
+#PermitUserEnvironment no
+#Compression yes
+#ClientAliveInterval 0
+#ClientAliveCountMax 3
+#UseDNS yes
+#PidFile /var/run/sshd.pid
+#MaxStartups 10
+
+# no default banner path
+#Banner /some/path
+
+# override default of no subsystems
+Subsystem	sftp	/usr/libexec/sftp-server
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html b/templates/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/var/www/htdocs/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/templates/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html b/templates/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2eec17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.d/var/www/missing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>404 - Not Found</title>
+</head>
+<body>
+  <center>
+  <pre>
+  O endere&ccedil;o que voc&ecirc; requisitou n&atilde;o p&ocirc;de ser encontrado :(
+  </pre>
+  </center>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/templates/vserver.s/GPG-KEY b/templates/vserver.s/GPG-KEY
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd23e95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.s/GPG-KEY
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+security@slackware.com public key
+
+Type  bits/keyID    Date       User ID
+pub  1024D/40102233 2003-02-26 Slackware Linux Project <security@slackware.com>
+sub  1024g/4E523569 2003-02-26 [expires: 2012-12-21]
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.1 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=H5uu
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+
+slamd64 public key
+
+-----BEGIN PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
+Version: GnuPG v1.2.6 (GNU/Linux)
+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+=D1wm
+-----END PGP PUBLIC KEY BLOCK-----
diff --git a/templates/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz b/templates/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..992ba79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz
diff --git a/templates/vserver.s/vserver.sh b/templates/vserver.s/vserver.sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b381092
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.s/vserver.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+#
+# vserver template script
+#
+
+DEVICES="/etc/simplepkg/vserver.s/devices.tar.gz"
+GPGKEY="/etc/simplepkg/vserver.s/GPG-KEY"
+
+if [ -z "$2" ]; then
+  echo "usage: `basename $0` <jail-root> <jail-name>"
+  exit 1
+elif [ ! -d "$1/$2" ]; then
+  echo "folder $1/$2 does not exist"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+echo "creating /etc/vservers/$2..."
+mv $1/$2 $1/$2.old
+vserver $2 build -m skeleton --force &> /dev/null
+rm -rf $1/$2 && mv $1/$2.old $1/$2 
+
+echo sysv > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/style
+echo 3 > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/runlevel.start
+echo 6 > /etc/vservers/$2/apps/init/runlevel.stop
+
+cp /etc/resolv.conf $1/$2/etc/
+cp /etc/localtime $1/$2/etc/
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 defaults 1 1 > $1/$2/etc/fstab                                                           
+echo /dev/hdv1 / ext2 rw 0 0 > $1/$2/etc/mtab                                                                  
+
+echo "creating devices and dependencies..."
+if [ -f "$DEVICES" ]; then
+  cd $1/$2/
+  tar zxvf $DEVICES
+  chroot $1/$2/ sbin/ldconfig
+else
+  echo error: device template $DEVICES not found
+fi
+
+if [ -f "$GPGKEY" ]; then
+  echo "importing slack gpg pubkey"                                                                                  
+  mkdir $1/$2/root/.gnupg                                                                                        
+  gpg --homedir $1/$2/root/.gnupg --import $GPGKEY
+fi
+
+# todo: add rebootmgr
+echo "done; now config your vserver at /etc/vservers/$2"
+echo "then, set all desired iptables rules and other stuff and then start $server vserver"
+echo "dont forget to change root's password with the command "vserver $2 exec passwd"" 
diff --git a/templates/vserver.template b/templates/vserver.template
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35432fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/templates/vserver.template
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+# 
+# This one comes from disk: A1 (Base Linux series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+aaa_base: ADD
+aaa_elflibs: ADD
+bash: ADD
+bin: ADD
+bzip2: ADD
+coreutils: ADD
+cxxlibs: ADD
+dcron: ADD
+elvis: ADD
+etc: ADD
+findutils: ADD
+gawk: ADD
+gettext: REC
+grep: ADD
+gzip: ADD
+infozip: ADD
+less: ADD
+logrotate: ADD
+openssl-solibs: ADD
+pkgtools: ADD
+procps: ADD
+sed: ADD
+shadow: ADD
+slocate: ADD
+sysklogd: ADD
+sysvinit: ADD
+tar: ADD
+util-linux: ADD
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: AP1 (Applications series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+bc: OPT
+diffutils: REC
+jed: OPT
+joe: OPT
+jove: OPT
+lsof: OPT
+mysql: OPT
+sudo: OPT
+vim: OPT
+glibc: REC
+# Tagfile for emacs series
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: F1 (Frequently Asked Questions)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+libidn: REC
+libxml2: REC
+mhash: REC
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from the N (Network/UUCP/Mail/News) series.
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# 
+#
+apache: OPT
+curl: OPT
+gnupg: OPT
+htdig: OPT
+inetd: REC
+lftp: OPT
+lynx: OPT
+mod_ssl: OPT
+nail: REC
+openssh: REC
+openssl: REC
+php: OPT
+rsync: OPT
+stunnel: OPT
+tcpip: REC
+wget: OPT
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#           
+# This one comes from disk: TCL1 (Tcl/Tk series)
+# and a backup copy called "tagfile.org" can be found on the same disk. You
+# should never edit the "tagfile.org" copy, only the one called "tagfile". Use
+# the "tagfile.org" only if you want to restore original installation defaults
+# by copying it over the top of "tagfile".
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+#
+# If you mess this file up beyond recognition, just restore from "tagfile.org"
+# 
+#
+# This is a Slackware Installation Tagfile.
+#
+# This one comes from disk: Y1 (Yaaaaaahhoooo? Games and Amusements).
+# 
+# It is used to automate software installation. 
+# There are two labels that you can use: ADD and SKP.
+#
+# If the PROMPT option is used during installation, this file will be checked
+# to determine the installation default. First, all the lines beginning with
+# <package_name>: 
+# will be extracted. Then, the last line in the extracted segment will be 
+# checked for the flags ADD, REC, OPT and SKP.
+#
+# If ADD is found, then a priority of [required] will be displayed, and the
+# package will be automatically installed. 
+#
+# If SKP is found, then a priority of [skip] will be displayed, and
+# the package will be automatically skipped.
+#
+# All other packages will be prompted for. There are two optional flags you
+# can use to change the package priority level shown when the user is 
+# prompted: REC and OPT. If REC is found, the priority shown will be
+# [recommended], while if OPT is found, the user sees priority [optional].
+#
+# If no flags are found for a given package, the user is shown priority
+# [unknown], and is prompted for whether the package should be installed.
+# extra
+libsafe
+# contrib
+simplepkg
+ssmtp
author	rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58>	2006-07-31 20:54:39 +0000
committer	rhatto <rhatto@04377dda-e619-0410-9926-eae83683ac58>	2006-07-31 20:54:39 +0000
commit	546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c (patch)
tree	c4108b4022d6e77cd4a1d02c78860b884178efa0 /templates
download	simplepkg-546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c.tar.gz simplepkg-546354758b9a532912651b047fab6a23f0cb0a3c.tar.bz2